ASME B PVC.

I X-2023

SECTION IX
We l d i n g , Br a zi n g , a n d Fu si n g Qu alific ations

2023
ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code
An International Code
Qual i fi cat i on St and ard for
We l d i ng , Brazi ng , an d Fu sin g
P roc e d ure s; We l d e rs; Bra zers;
and We l d i ng , B razi ng, a n d
Fusi ng Op e rat ors
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

PART QG
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

QG-100 SCOPE QG-101 PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION ð23Þ

(a) This Section contains requirements for the qualifi- A procedure specification is a written document
cation of welders, welding operators, brazers, brazing providing direction to the person applying the mate-
operators, plastic fusing operators, and the material- rial-joining process. Details for the preparation and quali-
joining processes they use during welding, brazing, and fication of procedure specifications for welding (WPS),
fusing operations for the construction of components brazing (BPS), and fusing (FPS) are given in the respective
under the rules of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Parts addressing those processes. Procedure specifica-
Vessel Code, the ASME B31 Codes for Pressure Piping, tions used by an organization (see QG-109.2) having
and other Codes, standards, and specifications that refer- responsibility for operational control of material-
ence this Section. This Section is divided into four parts. joining processes shall have been qualified by that orga-
(1) Part QG contains general requirements for all nization, or shall be a standard procedure specification
material-joining processes. acceptable under the rules of the applicable Part for
(2) Part QW contains requirements for welding. the joining process to be used. Procedure specifications
(3) Part QB contains requirements for brazing. shall be available for reference and review at the fabrica-
(4) Part QF contains requirements for plastic fusing. tion site.
(b) Whenever the referencing Code, standard, or spec- Procedure specifications address the conditions
ification imposes qualification requirements different (including ranges, if any) under which the material-
than those given in this Section, the requirements of joining process must be performed. These conditions
the referencing Code, standard, or specification shall are referred to in this Section as “variables.” A procedure
take precedence over the requirements of this Section. specification shall address, as a minimum, the specific
(c) Some of the more common terms relating to mate- essential and nonessential variables that are applicable
rial-joining processes are defined in QG-109. Whenever to the material-joining process to be used in production.
the word “pipe” is used, “tube” shall also be applicable. When the referencing code, standard, or specification
(d) New editions to Section IX may be used beginning requires toughness qualification of the material-joining
with the date of issuance and become mandatory 6 months procedure, the applicable supplementary essential vari-
after the date of issuance. ables shall also be addressed in the procedure specifica-
(e) Code Cases are permissible and may be used, begin- tion.
ning with the date of approval by ASME. Only Code Cases
that are specifically identified as being applicable to this QG-102 PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD
Section may be used. At the time a Code Case is applied, The purpose of qualifying the procedure specification is
only the latest revision may be used. Code Cases that have to demonstrate that the joining process proposed for
been incorporated into this Section or have been annulled construction is capable of producing joints having the
shall not be used for new qualifications, unless permitted required mechanical properties for the intended applica-
by the referencing Code. Qualifications using the provi- tion. Qualification of the procedure specification demon-
sions of a Code Case remain valid after the Code Case strates the mechanical properties of the joint made using a
is annulled. The Code Case number shall be listed on joining process, and not the skill of the person using the
the qualification record(s). joining process.
(f) Throughout this Section, references are made to The procedure qualification record (PQR) documents
various non-ASME documents. Unless a specific date is what occurred during the production of a procedure quali-
referenced, the latest edition of the reference document fication test coupon and the results of testing that coupon.
in effect at the time of performance or procedure quali- As a minimum, the PQR shall document the essential
fication is to be used. procedure qualification test variables applied during
production of the test joint, and the results of the required
tests. When toughness testing is required by the referen-
cing code, standard, or specification for qualification of the

1
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

procedure, the applicable supplementary essential vari- QG-105.3 Supplementary Essential Variables.
ables shall be recorded for each process. The organization Supplementary essential variables are conditions in
shall certify the PQR by a signature or other means as which a change will affect the toughness properties of
described in the organization’s quality program. The the joint, heat-affected zone, or base material. Supplemen-
PQR shall be available for review. A procedure specifica- tary essential variables become additional essential vari-
tion may be supported by one or more PQR(s), and one ables in situations where the referencing code, standard,
PQR may be used to support one or more procedure spec- or specification requires toughness testing for procedure
ification(s). qualification. When procedure qualification does not
require the addition of toughness testing, supplementary
QG-103 PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION essential variables are not applicable. See QW-401.1.
The purpose of qualifying the person who will use a QG-105.4 Nonessential Variables. Nonessential vari-
joining process is to demonstrate that person’s ability ables are conditions in which a change, as described in the
to produce a sound joint when using a procedure speci- specific variables, is not considered to affect the mechan-
fication. ical properties of the joint. These variables shall be
addressed in the procedure specification, as required
QG-104 PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION RECORD by QG-101.
The performance qualification record documents what A procedure specification may be editorially revised to
occurred during the production of a test coupon by a change a nonessential variable to fall outside of its
person using one or more joining processes following previously listed range, but does not require requalifica-
an organization’s procedure specification. As a tion of the procedure specification.
minimum, the record shall document QG-105.5 Special Process Variables. Special process
(a) the essential variables for each process used to variables are conditions that apply only to special
produce the test coupon processes that are described in the Part that addresses
(b) the ranges of variables qualified as required by the those processes. When these special processes are
applicable part (see QW-301.4, QB-301.4, and QF-301.4) used, only the applicable special process variables shall
(c) the results of the required testing and nondestruc- apply.
tive examinations
(d) the identification of the procedure specification(s) QG-105.6 Applicability. The applicable essential,
followed during the test supplementary essential, nonessential, and special
The organization shall state on the record that the process variables for a specific joining process are
performance qualification test was conducted in accor- given in the Part addressing that joining process.
dance with the requirements of this Section, and
certify the record by a signature or other means as QG-106 ORGANIZATIONAL RESPONSIBILITY
described in the organization’s quality program. Perfor- Personnel performing supervisory activities specified
mance qualification records shall be available for review. in this Section shall
(a) be designated by the organization with responsi-
QG-105 VARIABLES bility for supervision, control, evaluation, and acceptance
QG-105.1 Essential Variables (Procedure). Essential of qualification testing.
variables are conditions in which a change, as described (b) have a satisfactory level of competence in accor-
in the specific variables, is considered to affect the dance with the organization’s quality program. As a
mechanical properties (other than toughness) of the minimum, they shall be qualified by education, experience,
joint. Before using a procedure specification whose essen- or training in the following areas:
tial variables have been revised and fall outside their qual- (1) knowledge of the requirements of this Section for
ified range, the procedure specification must be the qualification of procedures and/or joining personnel
requalified. Procedure qualification records may be (2) knowledge of the organization’s quality program
changed when a procedure qualification test supporting (3) the scope, complexity, or special nature of the
the change has been completed, or when an editorial revi- activities to which oversight is to be provided
sion is necessary to correct an error, as permitted by the (c) have a record, maintained by the organization,
rules of the Part applicable to the material-joining process. containing objective evidence of the qualifications,
training, or experience.
QG-105.2 Essential Variables (Performance). Essen-
tial variables are conditions in which a change, as QG-106.1 Procedure Qualifications. Each organiza- ð23Þ
described in the specific variable list, will affect the tion is responsible for conducting the tests required by
ability of the person to produce a sound joint. this Section to qualify the procedures that are used in
the construction of components under the rules of the

2
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Codes, standards, and specifications that reference this provided the organization accepts full responsibility
Section. for any such work.
(a) The personnel who produce test joints for proce- (d) The performance qualification test may be termi-
dure qualification shall be under the full supervision and nated at any stage, whenever it becomes apparent to the
control of the qualifying organization during the produc- supervisor conducting the tests that the person being
tion of these test joints. tested does not have the required skill to produce satis-
(b) Production of qualification test joints under the factory results.
supervision and control of another organization is not (e) When a procedure qualification test coupon has
permitted, except as permitted in QG-106.4. However, been tested and found acceptable, the person who
it is permitted to subcontract any or all of the work nec- prepared the test coupon is also qualified for the
essary for preparing the materials to be joined, the subse- joining process used, within the ranges specified for
quent work for preparing test specimens from the performance qualification for the applicable process(es).
completed test joint, and the performance of nondestruc- (f) Persons who are successfully qualified shall be
tive examination and mechanical tests, provided the orga- assigned an identifying number, letter, or symbol by
nization accepts full responsibility for any such work. the organization, which shall be used to identify their
(c) If the effective operational control of procedure work.
qualifications for two or more companies of different (g) If effective operational control of performance
names exists under the same corporate ownership, the qualifications for two or more companies of different
companies involved shall describe in their quality names exists under the same corporate ownership, the
programs the operational control of procedure qualifica- companies involved shall describe in their quality
tions. In this case, separate procedure qualifications are programs the operational control of performance quali-
not required, provided all other requirements of this fications. In this case, requalification of persons working
Section are met. within the companies of such an organization are not
required, provided all other requirements of this
QG-106.2 Performance Qualifications. Each organiza-
Section are met.
tion is responsible for the supervision and control of mate-
rial joining performed by persons for whom they have QG-106.3 Simultaneous Performance Qualifications.
operational responsibility and control. The organization Organizations may participate in an association to collec-
shall conduct the tests required by this Section to qualify tively qualify the performance of one or more persons for
the performance of those persons with each joining material-joining processes simultaneously and may share
process they will use for the construction of components performance qualification information with other partici-
under the rules of the Codes, standards, and specifications pating organizations within the association. When simul-
that reference this Section. This requirement ensures that taneous performance qualifications are conducted, each
the qualifying organization has determined that the per- participating organization shall be represented by an
sonnel using its procedures are capable of achieving the employee with designated responsibility for performance
minimum requirements specified for an acceptable joint. qualifications.
This responsibility cannot be delegated to another orga- (a) The essential variables of the procedure specifica-
nization. tions to be followed during simultaneous performance
(a) The personnel who produce test joints for perfor- qualifications shall be compared by the participating orga-
mance qualification shall be tested under the full super- nizations, and shall be identical, except as otherwise
vision and control of the qualifying organization. provided in the Part addressing the specific joining
(b) The performance qualification test shall be method. The qualified thickness ranges need not be iden-
performed following either a qualified procedure speci- tical but shall include the test coupon thickness.
fication or a standard procedure specification acceptable (b) Alternatively, the participating organizations shall
under the rules of the applicable Part for the joining agree to follow a single procedure specification that has
process. The Part addressing any specific joining been reviewed and accepted by each participating orga-
process may exempt a portion of the procedure specifi- nization. Each participating organization shall have a
cation from being followed during production of the supporting PQR or shall have accepted responsibility
performance qualification test coupon. for using a standard procedure specification having a
(c) Production of test joints under the supervision and range of variables consistent with those to be followed
control of another organization is not permitted. It is during the performance qualification test, in accordance
permitted to subcontract any or all of the work necessary with the applicable Part for the joining method.
for preparing the materials to be joined in the test joint, (c) Each participating organization’s representative
and the subsequent work for preparing test specimens shall
from the completed test joint, and the performance of (1) positively identify the person whose perfor-
nondestructive examination and mechanical tests, mance is to be tested

3
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

(2) verify the markings on the test coupon corre- joining of a test coupon, the revised variables shall be
spond to the person’s identification agreed upon by the representatives of each participating
(3) verify that the positional orientation markings on organization.
the test coupon reflect the test position of the coupon as (c) Joining of the test coupon(s) shall be conducted
required to identify the location of test specimen removal under the simultaneous supervision of the representa-
(4) perform a visual examination of each completed tives of each participating organization.
test coupon and each test specimen to determine its (d) The PQR shall document that the qualification was
acceptability conducted under the provisions of QG-106.4.
(-a) When the test coupon(s) is prepared and the
test specimens are mechanically tested by an independent QG-107 OWNERSHIP TRANSFERS
laboratory, the laboratory's report may be used as the Organizations may maintain effective operational
basis for accepting the test methods and their results. control of PQRs, procedure specifications, and perfor-
(-b) When the test coupon(s) is examined by volu- mance qualification records under different ownership
metric examination, the examining organization's report than existed during the original procedure qualification.
may be used as the basis for acceptance of the test Multiple organizations under a common ownership may
methods, qualification and certification of the examiner, use PQRs, procedure specifications, and performance
and the results of the examination. qualification records under that owner’s name. The
(5) prepare and certify a performance qualification quality program of each organization shall describe the
record for each person qualified effective operational control and authority for technical
(d) When the qualified person changes employers direction of welding.
between participating organizations, the employing orga- When an organization or some part thereof is acquired
nization shall verify the continuity of the person’s quali- by a new owner(s), the PQRs, procedure specifications,
fications has been maintained by previous employers and performance qualification records may remain
since his qualification date, as required by the applicable valid for use by the new owner(s) without requalification;
Part for the joining method. Evidence of activities and the new owner(s) PQRs, procedure specifications, and
supporting performance qualification continuity may performance qualification records become valid for use by
be obtained from any member of the association, even the acquired organization, provided all of the following
if the member was not a participant in the simultaneous requirements have been met:
welder qualifications. (a) The new owner(s) takes responsibility for the
(e) If a person has had their performance qualification procedure specifications and performance qualification
revoked for specific reasons, the employing organization records.
shall notify all other participating organizations that the (b) The procedure specifications identify the name of
person’s qualification(s) has been revoked. The remaining the new owner(s) prior to use.
participating organizations shall determine whether they (c) The quality program documents the original source
will uphold or revoke the performance qualifications for of the PQRs, procedure specifications, and performance
that person in accordance with this Section. qualification records as being from the original qualifying
(f) When a person’s performance qualifications are organization.
collectively renewed in accordance with the applicable
Part for the joining method, the testing procedures QG-108 SPECIFICATIONS AND QUALIFICATIONS ð23Þ
shall follow the rules of this paragraph. MADE TO PREVIOUS EDITIONS
ð23Þ QG-106.4 Simultaneous Procedure Qualifications. Joining procedure specifications, procedure qualifica-
When expressly permitted by the referencing code, mate- tions, and performance qualifications that were made
rial-joining procedures may be simultaneously qualified in accordance with earlier Editions or Addenda of this
by more than one organization, provided that each orga- Section may be used in any construction for which the
nization accepts full responsibility for any such qualifica- current Edition has been specified.
tions and the following requirements are met: Procedure qualifications made in accordance with
(a) Each participating organization shall be repre- earlier Editions or Addenda may be used to support proce-
sented by an individual with responsibility for qualifica- dure specifications written to later Editions and Addenda
tion of joining procedures, as detailed in QG-106. provided the essential and, when required, supplemen-
(b) A preliminary joining procedure specification ac- tary essential variables specified by the later Editions
ceptable to the representatives of each participating orga- or Addenda were addressed on the previously qualified
nization shall be prepared addressing the essential and procedure qualification records.
nonessential variables and, when applicable, the supple- Procedure specifications, procedure qualification
mentary essential variables and other requirements that records, and performance qualification records meeting
are to be observed for each process to be used for joining the above requirements do not require amendment to
the test coupon(s). If any variables are revised during the

4
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

include any variables required by later Editions of Section backing gas: a gas, such as argon, helium, nitrogen, or reac-
IX, except as specified in QW-421.4. However, as required tive gas, which is employed to exclude oxygen from the
by QG-100(b), the qualification requirements of the refer- root side (opposite from the welding side) of weld joints.
encing code, standard, or specification shall be met. base metal: the metal or alloy that is welded, brazed, or cut.
Qualification of new procedure specifications for
joining processes, and performance qualifications for bead-up cycle: part of the butt-fusing process to ensure
persons applying them, shall be in accordance with the complete contact between the heater surface and the
current Edition of Section IX. pipe ends. The bead-up cycle begins when initial
contact of the pipe ends to the heater is made at butt-
fusing pressure until an indication of melt is observed
QG-109 DEFINITIONS around the pipe circumference.
QG-109.1 GENERAL bond line (brazing and thermal spraying): the cross section
of the interface between a braze or thermal spray deposit
Definitions of the more common terms relating to mate- and the substrate.
rial-joining processes are defined in QG-109.2. There are
terms listed that are specific to ASME Section IX and are bracketed qualification: a procedure qualification
not presently defined in AWS A3.0. Several definitions performed by preparing test coupons using combinations
have been modified slightly from AWS A3.0 so as to of high and low values of specified variables to establish
better define the context or intent as used in ASME the upper and lower range of qualification for those vari-
Section IX. ables.
braze: a joint produced by heating an assembly to suitable
ð23Þ QG-109.2 DEFINITIONS temperatures and by using a filler metal having a liquidus
arc seam weld: a seam weld made by an arc welding above 840°F (450°C) and below the solidus of the base
process. materials. The filler metal is distributed between the
closely fitted surfaces of the joint by capillary action.
arc spot weld: a spot weld made by an arc welding process.
brazer: one who performs a manual or semiautomatic
arc strike: any inadvertent discontinuity resulting from an
brazing operation.
arc, consisting of any localized remelted metal, heat-
affected metal, or change in the surface profile of any brazing: a group of metal joining processes which
metal object. The arc may be caused by arc welding elec- produces coalescence of materials by heating them to a
trodes, magnetic inspection prods, or frayed electrical suitable temperature, and by using a filler metal
cable. having a liquidus above 840°F (450°C) and below the
solidus of the base materials. The filler metal is distributed
arc welding: a group of welding processes wherein coales-
between the closely fitted surfaces of the joint by capillary
cence is produced by heating with an arc or arcs, with or
action.
without the application of pressure, and with or without
the use of filler metal. brazing operator: one who operates machine or automatic
brazing equipment.
as-brazed: adj. pertaining to the condition of brazements
after brazing, prior to any subsequent thermal, mechan- brazing temperature: the temperature to which the base
ical, or chemical treatments. metal(s) is heated to enable the filler metal to wet the base
metal(s) and form a brazed joint.
as-welded: adj. pertaining to the condition of weld metal,
welded joints, and weldments after welding but prior to brazing temperature range: the temperature range within
any subsequent thermal, mechanical, or chemical treat- which brazing can be conducted.
ments. brazing, automatic: brazing with equipment which
backgouging: the removal of weld metal and base metal performs the brazing operation without constant obser-
from the weld root side of a welded joint to facilitate vation and adjustment by a brazing operator. The equip-
complete fusion and complete joint penetration upon ment may or may not perform the loading and unloading
subsequent welding from that side. of the work.
backhand welding: a welding technique in which the brazing, block (BB): a brazing process that uses heat from
welding torch or gun is directed opposite to the progress heated blocks applied to the joint. This is an obsolete or
of welding. seldom used process.
backing: a material placed at the root of a weld joint for the brazing, dip (DB): a brazing process in which the heat
purpose of supporting molten weld metal. The material required is furnished by a molten chemical or metal
may or may not fuse into the joint. See also retainer. bath. When a molten chemical bath is used, the bath
may act as a flux; when a molten metal bath is used,
the bath provides the filler metal.

5
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

welding, resistance spot (RSW): a resistance welding wire-additive welding: the deposition of weld metal using a
process that produces a weld at the faying surfaces of welding process and wire filler metal to create a new
a joint by the heat obtained from resistance to the component either separately or joined to an existing
flow of welding current through the workpieces from elec- component.
trodes that serve to concentrate the welding current and
pressure at the weld area. Figure QG-109.2.1
Typical Single and Multibead Layers
welding, resistance stud: a resistance welding process
wherein coalescence is produced by the heat obtained Cover beads
from resistance to electric current at the interface
between the stud and the workpiece, until the surfaces
to be joined are properly heated, when they are 11 10 9
brought together under pressure. 8 7
welding, semiautomatic arc: arc welding with equipment 6 5
which controls only the filler metal feed. The advance of 4 3
the welding is manually controlled. 2
1
welding, shielded metal-arc (SMAW): an arc welding
process with an arc between a covered electrode and Layers
the weld pool. The process is used with shielding from
the decomposition of the electrode covering, without
the application of pressure, and with filler metal from
the electrode.
welding, stud: a general term for the joining of a metal stud Figure QG-109.2.2
or similar part to a workpiece. Welding may be accom- Typical Single Bead Layers
plished by arc, resistance, friction, or other suitable
Cover bead
process with or without external gas shielding.
welding, submerged-arc (SAW): an arc welding process
7
that uses an arc or arcs between a bare metal electrode
or electrodes and the weld pool. The arc and molten metal 6
are shielded by a blanket of granular flux on the work- 5
4
pieces. The process is used without pressure and with 3
filler metal from the electrode and sometimes from a 2
supplemental source (welding rod, flux, or metal gran- 1
ules). Layers
weldment: an assembly whose constituent parts are joined
by welding, or parts which contain weld metal overlay.

14
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

PART QW
WELDING

ARTICLE I
WELDING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

QW-100 SCOPE QW-102 PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION

The rules in this Part apply to the preparation of In performance qualification, the basic criterion estab-
Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and the qualifi- lished for welder qualification is to determine the welder’s
cation of welding procedures, welders, and welding opera- ability to deposit sound weld metal. The purpose of the
tors for all types of manual and machine welding performance qualification test for the welding operator is
processes permitted in this Part. These rules may also to determine the welding operator’s mechanical ability to
be applied, insofar as they are applicable, to other operate the welding equipment.
manual or machine welding processes permitted in
other Sections. QW-103 RESPONSIBILITY
QW-103.1 Welding. Each organization shall conduct
ð23Þ QW-101 PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION the tests required in this Section to qualify the welding
A WPS used by an organization that will have respon- procedures used in the construction of the weldments
sible operational control of production welding shall be a built under this Code and the performance of welders
WPS that has been qualified by that organization in accor- and welding operators who apply these procedures.
dance with Article II, or it shall be an AWS Standard QW-103.2 Records. Each organization shall maintain a
Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) listed in record of the results obtained in welding procedure and
Mandatory Appendix E and adopted by that organization welder and welding operator performance qualifications.
in accordance with Article V. Refer to recommended Forms in Nonmandatory Appendix
Both WPSs and SWPSs specify the variables (including B.
ranges, if any) under which welding must be performed.
These conditions include the base metals that are
permitted, the filler metals that must be used (if any), QW-110 WELD ORIENTATION
preheat and postweld heat treatment requirements, etc. The orientations of welds are illustrated in Figure
A WPS shall address, as a minimum, the specific vari- QW-461.1 or Figure QW-461.2.
ables, both essential and nonessential, as provided in
Article II for each process to be used in production QW-120 TEST POSITIONS FOR GROOVE
welding. In addition, when referencing codes, standards,
or specifications require toughness qualification of the
WELDS
WPS, the supplementary essential variables must be Groove welds may be made in test coupons oriented in
addressed in the WPS. any of the positions in Figure QW-461.3 or Figure
When a variable is outside the scope of a WPS (e.g., the QW-461.4 and as described in the following paragraphs,
variable applies to a P-Number not included on the WPS) except that an angular deviation of ±15 deg from the speci-
or is addressed by another variable (e.g., the AWS Classi- fied horizontal and vertical planes, and an angular devia-
fication specifies the filler metal product form), that vari- tion of ±5 deg from the specified inclined plane are
able need not be specifically addressed on the WPS or permitted during welding.
PQRs that support the WPS.
QW-121 PLATE POSITIONS
QW-121.1 Flat Position 1G. Plate in a horizontal plane
with the weld metal deposited from above. Refer to
Figure QW-461.3, illustration (a).

15
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-121.2 Horizontal Position 2G. Plate in a vertical QW-131.2 Horizontal Position 2F. Plates so placed that
plane with the axis of the weld horizontal. Refer to the weld is deposited with its axis horizontal on the upper
Figure QW-461.3, illustration (b). side of the horizontal surface and against the vertical
surface. Refer to Figure QW-461.5, illustration (b).
QW-121.3 Vertical Position 3G. Plate in a vertical plane
with the axis of the weld vertical. Refer to QW-131.3 Vertical Position 3F. Plates so placed that
Figure QW-461.3, illustration (c). the weld is deposited with its axis vertical. Refer to
Figure QW-461.5, illustration (c).
QW-121.4 Overhead Position 4G. Plate in a horizontal
plane with the weld metal deposited from underneath. QW-131.4 Overhead Position 4F. Plates so placed that
Refer to Figure QW-461.3, illustration (d). the weld is deposited with its axis horizontal on the under-
side of the horizontal surface and against the vertical
QW-122 PIPE POSITIONS surface. Refer to Figure QW-461.5, illustration (d).
QW-122.1 Flat Position 1G. Pipe with its axis hori-
QW-132 PIPE POSITIONS
zontal and rolled during welding so that the weld
metal is deposited from above. Refer to Figure QW-132.1 Flat Position 1F. Pipe with its axis inclined at
QW-461.4, illustration (a). 45 deg to horizontal and rotated during welding so that the
weld metal is deposited from above and at the point of
QW-122.2 Horizontal Position 2G. Pipe with its axis
deposition the axis of the weld is horizontal and the
vertical and the axis of the weld in a horizontal plane.
throat vertical. Refer to Figure QW-461.6, illustration (a).
Pipe shall not be rotated during welding. Refer to
Figure QW-461.4, illustration (b). QW-132.2 Horizontal Positions 2F and 2FR.
QW-122.3 Multiple Position 5G. Pipe with its axis hori- (a) Position 2F. Pipe with its axis vertical so that the
zontal and with the welding groove in a vertical plane. weld is deposited on the upper side of the horizontal
Welding shall be done without rotating the pipe. Refer surface and against the vertical surface. The axis of the
to Figure QW-461.4, illustration (c). weld will be horizontal and the pipe is not to be
QW-122.4 Multiple Position 6G. Pipe with its axis rotated during welding. Refer to Figure QW-461.6, illus-
inclined at 45 deg to horizontal. Welding shall be done tration (b).
without rotating the pipe. Refer to Figure QW-461.4, illus- (b) Position 2FR. Pipe with its axis horizontal and the
tration (d). axis of the deposited weld in the vertical plane. The pipe is
rotated during welding. Refer to Figure QW-461.6, illus-
QW-123 TEST POSITIONS FOR STUD WELDS tration (c).
QW-123.1 Stud Welding. Stud welds may be made in QW-132.3 Overhead Position 4F. Pipe with its axis
test coupons oriented in any of the positions as described vertical so that the weld is deposited on the underside
in QW-121 for plate and QW-122 for pipe (excluding of the horizontal surface and against the vertical
QW-122.1). In all cases, the stud shall be perpendicular surface. The axis of the weld will be horizontal and the
to the surface of the plate or pipe. See Figures pipe is not to be rotated during welding. Refer to
QW-461.7 and QW-461.8. Figure QW-461.6, illustration (d).
QW-132.4 Multiple Position 5F. Pipe with its axis hori-
QW-124 SPECIAL POSITIONS
zontal and the axis of the deposited weld in the vertical
QW-124.1 Test positions other than those defined in plane. The pipe is not to be rotated during welding. Refer
QW-120 through QW-123 are defined as “special posi- to Figure QW-461.6, illustration (e).
tions.”
QW-133 SPECIAL POSITIONS
QW-130 TEST POSITIONS FOR FILLET WELDS QW-133.1 Test positions other than those defined in
Fillet welds may be made in test coupons oriented in any QW-130 through QW-132 are defined as “special posi-
of the positions of Figure QW-461.5 or Figure QW-461.6, tions.”
and as described in the following paragraphs, except that
an angular deviation of ±15 deg from the specified hori-
zontal and vertical planes is permitted during welding.

QW-131 PLATE POSITIONS

QW-131.1 Flat Position 1F. Plates so placed that the
weld is deposited with its axis horizontal and its
throat vertical. Refer to Figure QW-461.5, illustration (a).

16
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-140 TYPES AND PURPOSES OF TESTS QW-150 TENSION TESTS

AND EXAMINATIONS
QW-151 SPECIMENS
QW-141 MECHANICAL TESTS Tension test specimens shall conform to one of the types
Mechanical tests used in procedure or performance illustrated in Figures QW-462.1(a) through QW-462.1(e)
qualification are specified in QW-141.1 through and shall meet the requirements of QW-153.
QW-141.5. QW-151.1 Reduced Section — Plate. Reduced-section
QW-141.1 Tension Tests. Tension tests as described in specimens conforming to the requirements given in
QW-150 are used to determine the ultimate strength of Figure QW-462.1(a) may be used for tension tests on
groove-weld joints. all thicknesses of plate.
(a) For thicknesses up to and including 1 in. (25 mm), a
QW-141.2 Guided-Bend Tests. Guided-bend tests as full thickness specimen shall be used for each required
described in QW-160 are used to determine the degree tension test.
of soundness and ductility of groove-weld joints. (b) For plate thickness greater than 1 in. (25 mm), full
QW-141.3 Fillet-Weld Tests. Tests as described in thickness specimens or multiple specimens may be used,
QW-180 are used to determine the size, contour, and provided (c) and (d) are complied with.
degree of soundness of fillet welds. (c) When multiple specimens are used, in lieu of full
thickness specimens, each set shall represent a single
QW-141.4 Toughness Tests. Tests as described in tension test of the full plate thickness. Collectively, all
QW-171 and QW-172 are used to determine the toughness of the specimens required to represent the full thickness
of the weldment. of the weld at one location shall comprise a set.
QW-141.5 Stud-Weld Test. Deflection bend, (d) When multiple specimens are necessary, the entire
hammering, torque, or tension tests as shown in thickness shall be mechanically cut into a minimum
Figures QW-466.4, QW-466.5, and QW-466.6, and a number of approximately equal strips of a size that
macro-examination performed in accordance with can be tested in the available equipment. Each specimen
QW-202.5, respectively, are used to determine accept- of the set shall be tested and meet the requirements of
ability of stud welds. QW-153.
QW-151.2 Reduced Section — Pipe. Reduced-section
QW-142 SPECIAL EXAMINATIONS FOR WELDERS specimens conforming to the requirements given in
Radiographic or Ultrasonic examination per QW-191 Figure QW-462.1(b) may be used for tension tests on
may be substituted for mechanical testing of QW-141 all thicknesses of pipe having an outside diameter
for groove-weld performance qualification as permitted greater than 3 in. (75 mm).
in QW-304 to prove the ability of welders to make (a) For thicknesses up to and including 1 in. (25 mm), a
sound welds. full thickness specimen shall be used for each required
tension test.
QW-143 EXAMINATION FOR WELDING (b) For pipe thicknesses greater than 1 in. (25 mm), full
OPERATORS thickness specimens or multiple specimens may be used,
provided (c) and (d) are complied with.
Radiographic or Ultrasonic examination per QW-191
(c) When multiple specimens are used, in lieu of full
may be substituted for mechanical testing of QW-141
thickness specimens, each set shall represent a single
for groove weld performance qualification as permitted
tension test of the full pipe thickness. Collectively, all
in QW-305 to prove the ability of welding operators to
of the specimens required to represent the full thickness
make sound welds.
of the weld at one location shall comprise a set.
(d) When multiple specimens are necessary, the entire
QW-144 VISUAL EXAMINATION
thickness shall be mechanically cut into a minimum
Visual examination as described in QW-194 is used to number of approximately equal strips of a size that
determine that the final weld surfaces meet specified can be tested in the available equipment. Each specimen
quality standards. of the set shall be tested and meet the requirements of
QW-153.
For pipe having an outside diameter of 3 in. (75 mm) or
less, reduced-section specimens conforming to the re-
quirements given in Figure QW-462.1(c) may be used
for tension tests.

17
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-151.3 Turned Specimens. Turned specimens (e) the specified minimum tensile strength is for full
conforming to the requirements given in Figure thickness specimens including cladding for Aluminum
QW-462.1(d) may be used for tension tests. Alclad materials (P-No. 21 through P-No. 23) less than
1
(a) For thicknesses up to and including 1 in. (25 mm), a ∕2 in. (13 mm). For Aluminum Alclad materials 1∕2 in.
single turned specimen may be used for each required (13 mm) and greater, the specified minimum tensile
tension test, which shall be a specimen of the largest strength is for both full thickness specimens that
diameter D of Figure QW-462.1(d) possible for test include cladding and specimens taken from the core.
coupon thickness [per Note (a) of Figure QW-462.1(d)].
(b) For thicknesses over 1 in. (25 mm), multiple speci- QW-160 GUIDED-BEND TESTS
mens shall be cut through the full thickness of the weld
with their centers parallel to the metal surface and not QW-161 SPECIMENS
over 1 in. (25 mm) apart. The centers of the specimens
adjacent to the metal surfaces shall not exceed 5∕8 in. (16 Guided-bend test specimens shall be prepared by
mm) from the surface. cutting the test plate or pipe to form specimens of approxi-
(c) When multiple specimens are used, each set shall mately rectangular cross section. The cut surfaces shall be
represent a single required tension test. Collectively, all designated the sides of the specimen. The other two
the specimens required to represent the full thickness of surfaces shall be called the face and root surfaces, the
the weld at one location shall comprise a set. face surface having the greater width of weld. The
(d) Each specimen of the set shall be tested and meet specimen thickness and bend radius are shown in
the requirements of QW-153. Figures QW-466.1, QW-466.2, and QW-466.3. For mate-
rials with less than 3% elongation, a macro-etch specimen
QW-151.4 Full-Section Specimens for Pipe. Tension shall be used in lieu of bend test at each bend test location.
specimens conforming to the dimensions given in Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with
Figure QW-462.1(e) may be used for testing pipe with QW-183(a). Figure QW-466.3 shows the recommended
an outside diameter of 3 in. (75 mm) or less. method of testing aluminum weldments. Guided-bend
specimens are of five types, depending on whether the
QW-152 TENSION TEST PROCEDURE axis of the weld is transverse or parallel to the longitudinal
The tension test specimen shall be ruptured under axis of the specimen, and which surface (side, face, or root)
tensile load. The tensile strength shall be computed by is on the convex (outer) side of bent specimen. The five
dividing the ultimate total load by the least cross-sectional types are defined as follows.
area of the specimen as calculated from actual measure- QW-161.1 Transverse Side Bend. The weld is trans-
ments made before the load is applied. verse to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is
bent so that one of the side surfaces becomes the
QW-153 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA — TENSION convex surface of the bent specimen. Transverse side-
TESTS bend test specimens shall conform to the dimensions
QW-153.1 Tensile Strength. Minimum values for shown in Figure QW-462.2.
procedure qualification are provided under the column Specimens of base metal thickness equal to or greater
heading “Minimum Specified Tensile, ksi” of than 11∕2 in. (38 mm) may be cut into approximately equal
Table QW/QB-422. In order to pass the tension test, strips between 3∕4 in. (19 mm) and 11∕2 in. (38 mm) wide for
the specimen shall have a tensile strength that is not testing, or the specimens may be bent at full width (see
less than requirements on jig width in Figure QW-466.1). When the
(a) the minimum specified tensile strength of the base width of the weld is so large that a bend specimen cannot
metal; or be bent so that the entire weld and heat affected zones are
(b) the minimum specified tensile strength of the within the bent portion, multiple specimens across the
weaker of the two, if base metals of different minimum entire weld and heat affected zones shall be used.
tensile strengths are used; or If multiple specimens are used in either situation above,
(c) the minimum specified tensile strength of the weld one complete set shall be made for each required test. Each
metal when the applicable Section provides for the use of specimen shall be tested and meet the requirements in
weld metal having lower room temperature strength than QW-163.
the base metal; QW-161.2 Transverse Face Bend. The weld is trans-
(d) if the specimen breaks in the base metal outside of verse to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is
the weld or weld interface, the test shall be accepted as bent so that the face surface becomes the convex
meeting the requirements, provided the strength is not surface of the bent specimen. Transverse face-bend
more than 5% below the minimum specified tensile test specimens shall conform to the dimensions shown
strength of the base metal. in Figure QW-462.3(a). For subsize transverse face
bends, see QW-161.4.

18
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-161.3 Transverse Root Bend. The weld is trans- When specimens wider than 11∕2 in. (38 mm) are to be
verse to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is bent as permitted in Figure QW-462.2, the test jig mandrel
bent so that the root surface becomes the convex must be at least 1∕4 in. (6 mm) wider than the specimen
surface of the bent specimen. Transverse root-bend width.
test specimens shall conform to the dimensions shown The plunger radius, B, shall be no larger than that given
in Figure QW-462.3(a). For subsize transverse root in Figure QW-466.1. When a bend specimen is tested from
bends, see QW-161.4. a coupon joining base metals having different B values, the
larger of the two B values may be used.
QW-161.4 Subsize Transverse Face and Root Bends.
Bend specimens taken from small diameter pipe coupons QW-163 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA — BEND TESTS
may be subsized in accordance with General Note (b) of
Figure QW-462.3(a). The weld and heat-affected zone of a transverse weld-
bend specimen shall be completely within the bent portion
QW-161.5 Longitudinal-Bend Tests. Longitudinal- of the specimen after testing.
bend tests may be used in lieu of the transverse side- The guided-bend specimens shall have no open discon-
bend, face-bend, and root-bend tests for testing weld tinuity in the weld or heat-affected zone exceeding 1∕8 in.
metal or base metal combinations, which differ markedly (3 mm), measured in any direction on the convex surface
in bending properties between of the specimen after bending. Open discontinuities occur-
(a) the two base metals, or ring on the corners of the specimen during testing shall not
(b) the weld metal and the base metal be considered unless there is definite evidence that they
QW-161.6 Longitudinal Face Bend. The weld is result from lack of fusion, slag inclusions, or other internal
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which discontinuities. For corrosion-resistant weld overlay clad-
is bent so that the face surface becomes the convex ding, no open discontinuity exceeding 1∕16 in. (1.5 mm),
surface of the bent specimen. Longitudinal face-bend measured in any direction, shall be permitted in the clad-
test specimens shall conform to the dimensions shown ding, and no open discontinuity exceeding 1∕8 in. (3 mm)
in Figure QW-462.3(b). shall be permitted along the approximate weld interface.
QW-161.7 Longitudinal Root Bend. The weld is
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which QW-170 TOUGHNESS TESTS
is bent so that the root surface becomes the convex
QW-171 TOUGHNESS TESTS
side of the bent specimen. Longitudinal root-bend test
specimens shall conform to the dimensions shown in QW-171.1 General. Toughness tests shall be made
Figure QW-462.3(b). when required by referencing codes. Test procedures
and apparatus shall conform to the requirements of
QW-162 GUIDED-BEND TEST PROCEDURE the referencing code. When not specified by the referen-
ð23Þ QW-162.1 Jigs. Guided-bend specimens shall be bent in cing code, the test procedures and apparatus shall
test jigs that are in substantial accordance with conform to the requirements of SA-370.
Figures QW-466.1 through QW-466.3. When using the QW-171.2 Acceptance. The acceptance criteria shall be
jigs illustrated in Figure QW-466.1 or Figure in accordance with that Section specifying toughness
QW-466.2, the side of the specimen turned toward the testing requirements.
gap of the jig shall be the face for face-bend specimens,
the root for root-bend specimens, and the side with the QW-171.3 Location and Orientation of Test Specimen.
greater discontinuities, if any, for side-bend specimens. The toughness test specimen removal and preparation re-
The specimen shall be forced into the die by applying quirements shall be as given in the Section requiring such
load on the plunger until the curvature of the specimen tests.
is such that a 1∕8 in. (3 mm) diameter wire cannot be When qualifying pipe in the 5G or 6G position, the tough-
inserted between the specimen and the die of Figure ness specimens shall be removed from the shaded portion
QW-466.1, or the specimen is bottom ejected if the of Figure QW-463.1(f).
roller type of jig (see Figure QW-466.2) is used.
QW-172 TOUGHNESS TESTS — DROP WEIGHT
When using the wrap around jig (see Figure QW-466.3),
the side of the specimen turned toward the roller shall be QW-172.1 General. Drop-weight tests shall be made
the face for face-bend specimens, the root for root-bend when required by referencing codes. Test procedures
specimens, and the side with the greater discontinuities, if and apparatus shall conform to the requirements of
any, for side-bend specimens. The bending is considered the referencing code. When not specified by the referen-
complete once the outer roll has moved at least 180 deg cing code, the test procedures and apparatus shall
from the starting point. conform to the requirements of ASTM specification E208.

19
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-172.2 Acceptance. The acceptance criteria shall be coupon for plate-to-plate shall be cut transversely to
in accordance with that Section requiring drop weight provide a center section approximately 4 in. (100 mm)
tests. long and two end sections, each approximately 1 in.
(25 mm) long. For pipe-to-plate or pipe-to-pipe, the
QW-172.3 Location and Orientation of Test Specimen.
test coupon shall be cut to provide two quarter sections
The drop weight test specimen, the crack starter location,
test specimens opposite to each other. One of the test
and the orientation shall be as given in the Section
specimens shall be fracture tested in accordance with
requiring such tests.
QW-182 and the other macro-examined to the require-
When qualifying pipe in the 5G or 6G position, the tough-
ments of QW-184. When qualifying pipe-to-plate or
ness specimens shall be removed from the shaded portion
pipe-to-pipe in the 5F position, the test specimens
of Figure QW-463.1(f).
shall be removed as indicated in Figure QW-463.2(h).

QW-180 FILLET-WELD TESTS QW-181.2.1 Production Assembly Mockups. Produc-

tion assembly mockups may be used in lieu of the
QW-181 PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE fillet-weld test coupon requirements of QW-181.2.
QUALIFICATION SPECIMENS When production assembly mockups are used, the
range qualified shall be limited to the fillet sizes, base
ð23Þ QW-181.1 Procedure. The dimensions and preparation metal thicknesses, and configuration of the mockup.
of the fillet-weld test coupon for procedure qualification as (a) Plate-to-Shape
required in QW-202 shall conform to the requirements in (1) The mockup for plate-to-shape shall be cut trans-
Figure QW-462.4(a) or Figure QW-462.4(d). Both sides of versely to provide three approximately equal test speci-
the vertical plate shown in Figure QW-462.4(a) shall be mens not to exceed approximately 2 in. (50 mm) in length.
welded. The test coupon for plate-to-plate shall be cut The test specimen that contains the start and stop of the
transversely to provide five test specimen sections, weld shall be fracture tested in accordance with QW-182.
each approximately 2 in. (50 mm) long. For pipe-to- A cut end of one of the remaining test specimens shall be
plate or pipe-to-pipe, the test coupon shall be cut trans- macro-examined in accordance with QW-184.
versely to provide four approximately equal test specimen (b) Pipe-to-Shape
sections. The test specimens shall be macro-examined to (1) The mockup for pipe-to-shape shall be cut trans-
the requirements of QW-183. versely to provide two quarter sections approximately
QW-181.1.1 Production Assembly Mockups. Produc- opposite to each other. The test specimen that contains
tion assembly mockups may be used in lieu of the start and stop of the weld shall be fracture tested in
QW-181.1. When a production assembly mockup is accordance with QW-182. A cut end of the other quarter
used, the range qualified shall be limited to the base section shall be macro-examined in accordance with
metal thickness, fillet weld size, and configuration of QW-184. When qualifying pipe-to-shape in the 5F posi-
the mockup. Alternatively, multiple production assembly tion, the fracture specimen shall be removed from the
mockups may be qualified. The range of thicknesses of the lower 90-deg section of the mockup.
base metal qualified shall be not less than the thickness of
the thinner member tested and not greater than the thick- QW-182 FRACTURE TESTS
ness of the thicker member tested. The range for fillet weld The stem of the 4 in. (100 mm) performance specimen
sizes qualified shall be limited to no less than the smallest center section in Figure QW-462.4(b) or the stem of the
fillet weld tested and no greater than the largest fillet weld quarter section in Figure QW-462.4(c), as applicable, shall
tested. The configuration of production assemblies shall be loaded laterally in such a way that the root of the weld is
be the same as that used in the production assembly in tension. The load shall be steadily increased until the
mockup. The mockups for plate-to-shape shall be cut specimen fractures or bends flat upon itself.
transversely to provide five approximately equal test If the specimen fractures, the fractured surface shall
specimens not to exceed approximately 2 in. (50 mm) show no evidence of cracks or incomplete root fusion,
in length. For pipe-to-shape mockups, the mockup and the sum of the lengths of inclusions and porosity
shall be cut transversely to provide four approximately visible on the fractured surface shall not exceed 3∕8 in.
equal test specimens. For small mockups, multiple (10 mm) in Figure QW-462.4(b) or 10% of the quarter
mockups may be required to obtain the required section in Figure QW-462.4(c).
number of test specimens. The test specimens shall be
macro-examined to the requirements of QW-183. QW-183 MACRO-EXAMINATION — PROCEDURE
QW-181.2 Performance. The dimensions and the SPECIMENS
preparation of the fillet-weld test coupon for performance One face of each cross section of the five test specimens
qualification shall conform to the requirements in in Figure QW-462.4(a) or four test specimens in Figure
Figure QW-462.4(b) or Figure QW-462.4(c). The test QW-462.4(d), as applicable shall be smoothed and

20
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

etched with a suitable etchant (see QW-470) to give a clear QW-190 OTHER TESTS AND EXAMINATIONS
definition to the weld metal and heat-affected zone. The
examination of the cross sections shall include only one QW-191 VOLUMETRIC NDE
side of the test specimen at the area where the plate or pipe
QW-191.1 Radiographic Examination.
is divided into sections i.e., adjacent faces at the cut shall
not be used. In order to pass the test QW-191.1.1 Method. The radiographic examination in
(a) visual examination of the cross sections of the weld QW-142 for welders and in QW-143 for welding operators
metal and heat-affected zone shall show complete fusion shall meet the requirements of Section V, Article 2, except
and freedom from cracks as follows:
(b) there shall be not more than 1∕8 in. (3 mm) difference (a) A written radiographic examination procedure is
in the length of the legs of the fillet not required. Demonstration of image quality require-
ments on production or technique radiographs shall be
QW-184 MACRO-EXAMINATION — considered satisfactory evidence of compliance with
PERFORMANCE SPECIMENS Section V, Article 2.
(b) Final acceptance of radiographs shall be based on
The cut end of one of the end plate sections, approxi-
the ability to see the prescribed image and the specified
mately 1 in. (25 mm) long, in Figure QW-462.4(b) or the
hole of a hole-type image quality indicator (IQI) or the
cut end of one of the pipe quarter sections in Figure
designated wire of a wire-type IQI. The acceptance stan-
QW-462.4(c), as applicable, shall be smoothed and
dards of QW-191.1.2 shall be met.
etched with a suitable etchant (see QW-470) to give a
clear definition of the weld metal and heat-affected QW-191.1.2 Acceptance Criteria.
zone. Visual examination of the cross section of the
weld metal and heat-affected zone shall reveal QW-191.1.2.1 Terminology. ð23Þ
(a) no incomplete fusion (a) Linear Indications. Cracks, incomplete fusion,
(b) no cracks inadequate penetration, and slag are represented on
(c) no other linear indications with a length greater the radiograph as linear indications in which the
than 1∕32 in. (0.8 mm) length is more than three times the width.
(d) no concavity or convexity greater than 1∕16 in. (1.5 (b) Rounded Indications. Porosity and inclusions such
mm) as slag or tungsten are represented on the radiograph as
(e) no more than 1∕8-in. (3-mm) difference between the rounded indications with a length three times the width or
fillet weld leg lengths less. These indications may be circular, elliptical, or irre-
gular in shape; may have tails; and may vary in density.
QW-185 DIFFUSION WELDING — PROCEDURE (c) Thickness. The term “thickness” or “t” refers to the
AND PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION thickness of the weld excluding any allowable reinforce-
SPECIMENS ment. For a groove weld joining two base metals having
different thicknesses at the weld, thickness is the thinner
QW-185.1 The test block shall be a minimum of 8 in. × 8
of the two base metals being joined.
in. (200 mm × 200 mm) and of a thickness such that there
are at least 50 interface planes being welded. QW-191.1.2.2 Qualification Test Welds. Weld rein- ð23Þ
forcement may be removed or left in place but shall not be
QW-185.2 A minimum of three tension test specimens
considered when determining the thickness for which the
in accordance with the requirements of SA-370 shall be
welder is qualified.
taken perpendicular to the interface planes and three
Welder and welding operator performance tests by
parallel to the interface planes. The tension test results
radiography of welds in test assemblies shall be judged
shall comply with QW-153.
unacceptable when the radiograph exhibits any imperfec-
QW-185.3 Microstructural evaluation shall be tions in excess of the limits specified below
conducted in accordance with the requirements of (a) Linear Indications
ASTM E3 on a minimum of three cross-sections, one (1) any type of indication characterized as a crack or
each from the top, center, and bottom one-third of the zone of incomplete fusion or penetration
test coupon. The samples shall be polished, etched, and (2) any other elongated indication that has a length
shall be free from cracks and shall show no incomplete greater than
bond or porosity on or adjacent to the bond lines. Size (-a) 1∕8 in. (3 mm) for t up to 3∕8 in. (10 mm), inclu-
of each sample shall be that which can be mounted sive
and polished to allow examination with an optical micro- (-b) 1∕3t for t greater than 3∕8 in. to 21∕4 in. (10 mm to
scope at 50X to 100X magnification. 57 mm), inclusive
(-c) 3∕4 in. (19 mm) for t greater than 21∕4 in. (57
mm)

21
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

(3) any group of aligned indications having an aggre- (a) All indications characterized as cracks, lack of
gate length greater than t in a length of 12t, except when fusion, or incomplete penetration are unacceptable
the distance between the successive imperfections regardless of length.
exceeds 6L where L is the length of the longest imperfec- (b) Indications exceeding 1∕8 in. (3 mm) in length are
tion in the group considered relevant, and are unacceptable when their
(b) Rounded Indications lengths exceed
(1) Relevant Indications. Only those rounded indica- (1) 1∕8 in. (3 mm) for thicknesses up to 3∕8 in. (10 mm),
tions that exceed the following dimensions shall be consid- inclusive
ered relevant: (2) 1∕3 the thickness for thicknesses greater than 3∕8
(-a) 1/10t for t less than 1/8 in. (3 mm) in. up to 21∕4 in. (10 mm to 57 mm), inclusive
(-b) 1/64 in. (0.4 mm) for t equal to 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. (3) 3∕4 in. (19 mm) for thicknesses greater than 21∕4 in.
(3 mm to 6 mm), inclusive (57 mm)
(-c) 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) for t greater than 1/4 in. to
QW-191.2.3 Acceptance Criteria for Production Welds.
2 in. (6 mm to 50 mm), inclusive
The acceptance criteria for welders or welding operators
(-d) 1 /16 in. (1.5 mm) for t greater than 2 in.
who qualify on production welds by ultrasonic examina-
(50 mm)
tion as permitted in QW-304.1 or QW-305.1 shall be per
(2) Maximum Size of Rounded Indications
QW-191.2.2.
(-a) The maximum permissible dimension for
rounded indications shall be 20% of t or QW-191.3 Record of Tests. The results of welder and
1
∕8 in. (3 mm), whichever is smaller. welding operator performance tests evaluated by volu-
(-b) For welds in material less than 1∕8 in. (3 mm) in metric NDE shall be recorded in accordance with
thickness, the maximum number of acceptable rounded QW-301.4.
indications shall not exceed 12 in a 6 in. (150 mm)
length of weld. A proportionately fewer number of QW-191.4 Personnel Qualifications and Certifica-
rounded indications shall be permitted in welds less tions.
than 6 in. (150 mm) in length. (a) All personnel performing volumetric examinations
(-c) For welds in material 1∕8 in. (3 mm) or greater for welder and welding operator qualifications shall be
in thickness, the charts in Figure QW-191.1.2.2 (b)(4) qualified and certified in accordance with their employer’s
represent the m axim um acceptable types of rounded written practice.
indications illustrated in typically clustered, assorted, and (b) The employer’s written practice for qualification
random ly dispersed configurations. and certification of examination personnel shall meet
QW-191.1.2.3 Production Welds. The acceptance all applicable requirements of Section V, Article 1.
criteria for welders or welding operators who qualify (c) If the weld being examined is a production weld, the
on production welds by radiography as permitted in examiner may be qualified and certified in accordance
QW-304.1 or QW-305.1 shall be per QW-191.1.2.2. with the requirements of the referencing code as an alter-
native to the requirements of this paragraph.
QW-191.2 Ultrasonic Examination
QW-192 STUD-WELD TESTS
QW-191.2.1 Method
QW-192.1 Procedure Qualification Specimens.
(a) The ultrasonic examination in QW-142 for welders
and in QW-143 for welding operators may be conducted QW-192.1.1 Required Tests. Ten stud-weld tests are
on test welds in material 1∕4 in. (6 mm) thick or greater. required to qualify each procedure. The equipment
(b) Ultrasonic examinations shall be performed using a used for stud welding shall be completely automatic
written procedure in compliance with Section V, Article 1, except for manual starting.
T-150 and the requirements of Section V, Article 4 for Every other welding stud (five joints) shall be tested
methods and procedures. either by hammering over until one-fourth of its length
(c) For terminology, see QW-191.1.2.1. is flat on the test piece, or by bending the stud to an
angle of at least 15 deg and returning it to its original posi-
QW-191.2.2 Acceptance Criteria for Qualification Test tion using a test jig and an adapter location dimension that
Welds. Weld reinforcement may be removed or left in
are in accordance with Figure QW-466.4.
place but shall not be considered when determining The remaining five welded stud joints shall be tested in
the deposited weld thickness for which the welder is qual- torque using a torque testing arrangement that is substan-
ified. tially in accordance with Figure QW-466.5. Alternatively,
Indications shall be sized using the applicable where torquing is not feasible, tensile testing may be used,
technique(s) provided in the written procedure for the and the fixture for tensile testing shall be similar to that
examination method. Indications shall be evaluated for shown in Figure QW-466.6, except that studs without
acceptance as follows:

22
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Figure QW-191.1.2.2(b)(4)
Rounded Indication Charts

Typical Quantity and Size Permitted

in 6 in. (150 mm) Length of Weld
1/ in. (3 mm) to 1/ in. (6 mm)
8 4
Thickness

Typical Quantity and Size Permitted

in 6 in. (150 mm) Length of Weld
Over 1/4 in. (6 mm) to 1/2 in. (13 mm)
Thickness

Typical Quantity and Size Permitted

in 6 in. (150 mm) Length of Weld
Over 1/2 in. (13 mm) to 1 in. (25 mm)
Thickness

Typical Quantity and Size Permitted

in 6 in. (150 mm) Length of Weld
Over 1 in. (25 mm) Thickness

23
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

heads may be gripped on the unwelded end in the jaws of

the tensile testing machine. Required Torque for Testing Threaded Austenitic
Stainless Steel Studs
QW-192.1.2 Acceptance Criteria — Bend and Hammer Nominal Diameter Threads/in. and Testing Torque,
Tests. In order to pass the test(s), each of the five stud of Studs, in. (mm) Series Designated ft-lb (J)
welds and heat-affected zones shall be free of visible sep- 1
∕4 (6.4) 28 UNF 4.5 (6.1)
aration or fracture after bending and return bending or 1
∕4 (6.4) 20 UNC 4.0 (5.4)
after hammering.
5
∕16 (7.9) 24 UNF 9.0 (12.2)
QW-192.1.3 Acceptance Criteria — Torque Tests. In 5
∕16 (7.9) 18 UNC 8.0 (10.8)
order to pass the test(s), each of the five stud welds
shall be subjected to the required torque shown in the 3
∕8 (9.5) 24 UNF 16.5 (22.4)
following table before failure occurs. 3
∕8 (9.5) 16 UNC 14.5 (19.7)

Required Torque for Testing Threaded Carbon Steel Studs 7

∕16 (11.1) 20 UNF 26.0 (35.3)
Nominal Diameter Threads/in. and Testing Torque, 7
∕16 (11.1) 14 UNC 23.0 (31.2)
of Studs, in. (mm) Series Designated ft-lb (J)
1
1
∕4 (6.4) 28 UNF 5.0 (6.8) ∕2 (12.7) 20 UNF 40.0 (54.2)
1
1
∕4 (6.4) 20 UNC 4.2 (5.7) ∕2 (12.7) 13 UNC 35.5 (48.1)
5
5
∕16 (7.9) 24 UNF 9.5 (12.9) ∕8 (15.9) 18 UNF 80.00 (108.5)
5
5
∕16 (7.9) 18 UNC 8.6 (11.7) ∕8 (15.9) 11 UNC 71.00 (96.3)
3
3 ∕4 (19.0) 16 UNF 140.00 (189.8)
∕8 (9.5) 24 UNF 17 (23.0) 3
3 ∕4 (19.0) 10 UNC 125.00 (169.5)
∕8 (9.5) 16 UNC 15 (20.3)
7
7
∕8 (22.2) 14 UNF 223.00 (302.3)
∕16 (11.1) 20 UNF 27 (36.6) 7
7
∕8 (22.2) 9 UNC 202.00 (273.9)
∕16 (11.1) 14 UNC 24 (32.5)
1 (25.4) 14 UNF 339.00 (459.6)
1
∕2 (12.7) 20 UNF 42 (57.0) 1 (25.4) 8 UNC 303.00 (410.8)
1
∕2 (12.7) 13 UNC 37 (50.2)

9
Alternatively, where torquing to destruction is not
∕16 (14.3) 18 UNF 60 (81.4)
9
feasible, tensile testing may be used. For carbon and aus-
∕16 (14.3) 12 UNC 54 (73.2)
tenitic stainless steel studs, the failure strength shall be
5 not less than 35,000 psi (240 MPa) and 30,000 psi (210
∕8 (15.9) 18 UNF 84 (114.0)
5
MPa), respectively. For other metals, the failure strength
∕8 (15.9) 11 UNC 74 (100.0)
shall not be less than half of the minimum specified tensile
3
∕4 (19.0) 16 UNF 147 (200.0)
strength of the stud material. The failure strength shall be
3 based on the minor diameter of the threaded section of
∕4 (19.0) 10 UNC 132 (180.0)
externally threaded studs, except where the shank
7
∕8 (22.2) 14 UNF 234 (320.0) diameter is less than the minor diameter, or on the original
7 cross-sectional area where failure occurs in a
∕8 (22.2) 9 UNC 212 (285.0)
nonthreaded, internally threaded, or reduced-diameter
1 (25.4) 12 UNF 348 (470.0) stud.
1 (25.4) 8 UNC 318 (430.0) QW-192.1.4 Macro-Examination. In order to pass the
macro-examination, each of the five sectioned specimens
shall be smoothed and etched with a suitable etchant (see
QW-470) to give clear definition of the stud welds and the
heat-affected zones. The welds and heat-affected zones
shall be free of cracks when examined at 10X magnifica-
tion.

QW-192.2 Performance Qualification Specimens.

QW-192.2.1 Required Tests. Five stud-weld tests are
required to qualify each stud-welding operator. The
equipment used for stud welding shall be completely auto-
matic except for manual starting. The performance test

24
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

shall be welded in accordance with a qualified WPS per (b) no cracking

QW-301.2. (c) complete fusion of the weld deposit into the tube-
Each stud (five joints) shall be tested either by sheet and tube wall face
hammering over until one-fourth of its length is flat on
QW-193.2 Performance Qualification Specimens. A
the test piece or by bending the stud to an angle of at
minimum of five mockup tube-to-tubesheet welds are
least 15 deg and returning it to its original position
required to qualify each welder or welding operator.
using a test jig and an adapter location dimension that
The same rules as those applicable for procedure quali-
are in accordance with Figure QW-466.4.
fication (see QW-193.1) shall be followed, with the
QW-192.2.2 Acceptance Criteria — Bend and Hammer following additional requirements and exceptions:
Tests. In order to pass the test(s), each of the five stud (a) The essential variables in QW-387 shall apply.
welds and heat affected zones shall be free of visible sep- (b) Essential performance qualification variables ap-
aration or fracture after bending and return bending or plicable for each welding process listed in QW-350 or
after hammering. QW-360 shall also be observed in addition to the variables
of Table QW-388.
QW-193 TUBE-TO-TUBESHEET TESTS (c) Postweld heat treatment may be omitted.
When the applicable Code Section requires the use of Only one mockup weld is required to renew a welder’s
this paragraph for tube-to-tubesheet demonstration or welding operator’s qualification when that qualification
mockup qualification, QW-193.1 through QW-193.1.3 has expired or has been revoked per the requirements of
shall apply. QW-322.

QW-193.1 Procedure Qualification Specimens. Ten QW-194 VISUAL EXAMINATION —

mockup welds are required for qualifying each tube-to- PERFORMANCE
tubesheet welding procedure. The mockup assembly
shall essentially duplicate the tube-to-tubesheet weld Performance test coupons shall show no cracks and
joint design to be used in production, within the limits complete joint penetration with complete fusion of
of the essential variables of QW-288. The mockup test weld metal and base metal.
assembly shall be prepared with the tubesheet element
QW-195 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION
having a thickness not less than the lesser of the thickness
of the production tubesheet or 2 in. (50 mm). For tube-to- QW-195.1 The liquid penetrant examination in ð23Þ
tubesheet welds to clad tubesheets, the cladding or QW-214 for corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay
overlay may be represented by a base material with a shall meet the requirements of Section V, Article 6.
chemical composition that is essentially equivalent to The liquid penetrant examiners shall meet the require-
the cladding composition. All welds in the mockup ments in QW-195.3. The acceptance standards of
assembly shall be subjected to the following tests and QW-195.2 shall be met.
shall meet the applicable acceptance criteria.
QW-195.2 Liquid Penetrant Acceptance Criteria.
QW-193.1.1 Visual Examination. The accessible
surfaces of the welds shall be examined visually with QW-195.2.1 Terminology.
no magnification required. The welds shall show complete relevant indications: indications with major dimensions
fusion, be free from visual cracks or porosity indications, greater than 1∕16 in. (1.5 mm)
and have no evidence of burning through the tube wall. linear indications: an indication having a length greater
ð23Þ QW-193.1.2 Liquid Penetrant. The liquid penetrant than three times the width.
examination shall meet the requirements of Section V, rounded indications: an indication of circular or elliptical
Article 6. The weld surfaces shall meet the requirements shape with the length equal to or less than three times the
of QW-195.2. Liquid penetrant examiners shall meet the width.
requirements in QW-195.3.
QW-195.2.2 Acceptance Standards. Procedure and
QW-193.1.3 Macro-Examination. The mockup welds performance tests examined by liquid penetrant techni-
shall be sectioned through the center of the tube for ques shall be judged unacceptable when the examination
macro-examination. The four exposed surfaces shall be exhibits any indication in excess of the limits specified in
smoothed and etched with a suitable etchant (see the following:
QW-470) to give a clear definition of the weld and (a) relevant linear indications
heat-affected zone. Using a magnification of 10X to (b) relevant rounded indications greater than 3 ∕ 16
20X, the exposed cross sections of the weld shall confirm in. (5 mm)
(a) minimum leak path dimension required by the (c) four or more relevant rounded indications in a line
design separated by 1∕16 in. (1.5 mm) or less (edge-to-edge)

25
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

ð23Þ QW-195.3 Personnel Certification. The organization calculated according to the following equation, is no
shall certify that personnel performing liquid penetrant less than that specified in Table QW/QB-422 for the
examinations meet the following minimum requirements: weaker of the two base metals joined:
(a) The personnel shall have vision, with correction if load to failure
necessary, to enable the reading of a Jaeger Type No. 2 strength =
area ofthe nugget
Standard Chart at a distance of not less than 12 in.
(300 mm). They shall also be capable of distinguishing where the area of the nugget = π × d2/4 and d equals the
and differentiating contrast between colors used. minimum diameter of the spot or projection weld at the
These requirements shall be checked annually. faying surface. The diameter shall be no less than that
(b) The personnel shall be competent in the techniques specified in the table in QW-196.1.2 for the thinner of
of the liquid penetrant examination method for which they the two members joined.
are certified. This includes making the examination and
interpreting and evaluating the results. Where the exam- QW-196.2.2 Peel test specimens shall be prepared as
ination method consists of more than one operation, the shown in Figure QW-462.8.1 for spot and projection
examiner may be certified as being qualified for only one welding and per Figure QW-462.8.2 for seam welding.
operation or for multiple operations. The specimens shall be peeled or separated mechanically,
and fracture shall occur in the base metal by tearing out of
QW-196 RESISTANCE WELD TESTING the weld in order for the specimen to be acceptable.
QW-196.1 Macro-Examination.
QW-197 LASER BEAM WELDING (LBW) LAP JOINT
QW-196.1.1 Welds shall be cross-sectioned, polished, TESTS
and etched to reveal the weld metal. The section shall be
examined at 10X magnification. Seam welding specimens QW-197.1 Procedure Qualification Specimens.
shall be prepared as shown in Figure QW-462.7.3. The QW-197.1.1 Required Tests. Six tension shear speci-
sectioned weldment shall be free of cracks, incomplete mens and eight macro specimens are required to
penetration, expulsions, and inclusions. Porosity shall qualify each procedure. The qualification test coupon
not exceed one void in the transverse cross section or shall be prepared in accordance with Figure QW-464.1.
three voids in the longitudinal cross section of a specimen. The tension shear specimens shall conform to the dimen-
The maximum dimension of any void shall not exceed 10% sions indicated in the table of Figure QW-464.1. The lon-
of the thickness of the weld bead. gitudinal and transverse sections indicated in Figure
QW-196.1.2 For spot and seam welds, the minimum QW-464.1 shall be cross-sectioned as closely as possible
diameter or width of the weld nugget shall be as through the centerline of the weld. A minimum of 1 in. (25
follows in relation to thickness, T, of the thinner member. mm) shall be provided for examination of each longitu-
dinal specimen. The transverse specimens shall be of suffi-
Material Thickness, T, in. (mm) Weld Nugget Width cient length to include weld, the heat-affected zone, and
<0.010 (0.25) 6T portions of the unaffected base material. Cross-sections
≥0.010 (0.25) and <0.020 (0.50) 5T shall be smoothed and etched with a suitable etchant
≥0.020 (0.50) and <0.040 (1.00) 4T (see QW-470), and examined at a minimum magnification
≥0.040 (1.00) and <0.069 (1.75) 3T
of 25X. The dimensions of the fusion zone and penetration
of each weld of the transverse specimens shall be
≥0.069 (1.75) and <0.100 (2.54) 2.50T
measured to the nearest hundredth of an inch and
≥0.100 (2.54) and <0.118 (3.00) 2.25T
recorded.
≥0.118 (3.00) and <0.157 (4.00) 2T
≥0.157 (4.00) 1.80T QW-197.1.2 Acceptance Criteria — Tension Shear
Tests. In order to pass the tension shear test(s), the re-
The weld depth (extent of fusion) shall be a minimum of quirements of QW-153 shall apply.
20% of the thickness of the thinner ply (in each member) QW-197.1.3 Acceptance Criteria — Macro-Examina-
and a maximum of 80% of the total thickness of all plies. tion. In order to pass the macro-examination, each of
QW-196.1.3 For projection welds, the width of the the eight specimens shall meet the following criteria:
nugget shall be not less than 80% of the width of the (a) The outline of the fusion zone shall be generally
projection. consistent in size and regular in shape and uniformity
of penetration.
QW-196.2 Mechanical Testing. (b) The examination of the weld area shall reveal sound
weld metal, complete fusion along the bond line, and
QW-196.2.1 Shear test specimens shall be prepared as
complete freedom from cracks in the weld metal and
shown on Figure QW-462.9. For spot and projection welds, heat-affected zone.
each test specimen shall produce a strength that, when

26
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-197.2 Performance Qualification Specimens. strips of a length sufficient to perform bend tests. The
maximum width of each strip shall be 11∕2 in.
QW-197.2.1 Required Tests. A peel test specimen at
(38 mm) and the minimum width
least 6 in. (150 mm) long shall be prepared as shown
in Figure QW-464.2 illustration (a) and macro specimens
as shown in Figure QW-464.2 illustration (b). The peel test w = T + D 4 for pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller
specimens shall be peeled apart to destruction and the
fusion zone and penetration measured to the nearest
hundredth of an inch. The end of each strip of the w = T + D 8 for pipes greater than NPS 2 (DN 50)
macro coupon shall be polished and etched to clearly
reveal the weld metal. The width and depth of penetration where
of each weld shall be measured to the nearest hundredth of
an inch. Each specimen shall be examined in accordance D = OD of the tube
with QW-197.1. T = nominal wall thickness
w = width of the specimen
QW-197.2.2 Acceptance Criteria — Peel Test and
Macro-Examination. In order to pass the peel test and One edge of one strip from each coupon shall be
macro-examination, the dimensions of the fusion zone polished to a 600 grit finish with the final grinding parallel
(averaged) and the penetration (averaged) shall be to the long axis of the strip. The polished surface shall be
within the range of dimensions of those specified on examined at 5X magnification. No incomplete fusion or
the WPS that was used to make the test coupon. other open flaws on the polished surface are acceptable.
Defects occurring in the base metal not associated with the
QW-199 FLASH WELDING weld may be disregarded. For nontubular cross sections,
QW-199.1 Procedure Qualification Test Coupons and four side-bend specimens shall be prepared from the two
Testing. remaining coupons as specified in Figure QW-462.2 and
polished for examination.
QW-199.1.1 Test Coupon Preparation. For coupons All flash shall be removed from the strips and the welds
NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller, four test welds shall be shall be visually examined per QW-194. Half of the strips
made, and for pipes over NPS 1 (DN 25), three test from each pipe specimen shall then be prepared as root
coupons shall be made using one set of welding param- bend specimens and the remaining strips shall be
eters (i.e., the same equipment, base metals, joint prepara- prepared as face bend specimens in accordance with
tion, and other essential variables to be utilized for QW-160. The specimens shall be tested in accordance
production welding.) These variables shall be recorded with QW-160, except for the following:
on the qualification record. (a) For P-No. 1, Groups 2 through 4 materials, the
QW-199.1.2 Tensile Tests. For pipes NPS 1 (DN 25) and minimum bend radius (dimension B in Figure
smaller, and nontubular cross sections, two full-section QW-466.1) shall be three times the thickness of the
tensile specimens shall be prepared in accordance with specimen.
Figure QW-462.1(e). For pipes greater than NPS 1 (DN (b) In lieu of QW-163, the sum of lengths of individual
25), two reduced section tension specimens shall be open flaws on the convex surface of all the bend test speci-
prepared in accordance with Figure QW-462.1(b) or mens taken from each pipe individually shall not exceed
Figure QW-462.1(c) from one coupon. For nontubular 5% of the outside circumference of that test pipe.
cross sections, two reduced section tension specimens QW-199.2 Flash Welding — Performance Qualifica-
shall be prepared in accordance with Figure tion Test Coupons and Testing. One test coupon shall
QW-462.1(a) or Figure QW-462.1(d) from two of the be welded, cut into strips, visually examined, and bend
coupons. The specimens shall be tested in accordance tested in accordance with QW-199.1.3. Polishing and
with QW-150. examination of a cross-section is not required.
QW-199.1.3 Section and Bend Testing. The entire
circumference of each remaining pipe coupon shall be
cut along the axis of the pipe into an even number of

27
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

APPENDIX I
ROUNDED INDICATION CHARTS

Illustration that appeared in this Appendix in the previous edition and addenda has been designated as
Figure QW-191.1.2.2(b)(4), which follows QW-191.1.2.2(b)(3).

28
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

ARTICLE II
WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATIONS

QW-200 GENERAL QW-200.2 A Procedure Qualification Record is defined ð23Þ

as follows:
ð23Þ QW-200.1 A Welding Procedure Specification is (a) Procedure Qualification Record (PQR). The PQR is a
defined as follows: record of variables recorded during the welding of the test
(a) Welding Procedure Specification (WPS). A WPS is a coupons. It also contains the test results of the tested
written qualified welding procedure prepared to provide specimens. Recorded variables normally fall within a
direction for making production welds to Code require- small range of the actual variables that will be used in
ments. The WPS or other documents may be used to production welding.
provide direction to the welder or welding operator to (b) Contents of the PQR. The completed PQR shall docu-
assure compliance with the Code requirements. ment all essential and, when required, supplementary
(b) Contents of the WPS. The completed WPS shall essential variables of QW-250 for each welding process
describe all the essential, nonessential, and, when used during the welding of the test coupon. Nonessential
required, supplementary essential variables for each or other variables used during the welding of the test
welding process used in the WPS. These variables are coupon may be recorded at the organization's option.
listed for each process in QW-250 and are defined in All variables, if recorded, shall be the actual variables
Article IV, Welding Data. (including ranges) used during the welding of the test
The WPS shall reference the supporting Procedure coupon. If variables are not monitored during welding,
Qualification Record(s) (PQR) described in QW-200.2. they shall not be recorded. It is not intended that the
The WPS may include any other information that full range or the extreme of a given range of variables
might be helpful in making a welding joint. to be used in production be used during qualification
(c) Changes to the WPS. Changes may be made in the unless required due to a specific essential or, when
nonessential variables of a WPS to suit production re- required, supplementary essential variable.
quirements without requalification provided such The PQR shall be certified accurate by the organization.
changes are documented with respect to the essential, The organization may not subcontract the certification
nonessential, and, when required, supplementary essen- function. This certification is intended to be the organi-
tial variables for each process. This may be by amendment zation's verification that the information in the PQR is
to the WPS or by use of a new WPS. a true record of the variables that were used during
Changes in essential or supplementary essential vari- the welding of the test coupon and that the resulting
ables require requalification of the WPS (i.e., new or addi- tensile, bend, or macro (as required) test results are in
tional PQRs to support the change in essential or compliance with Section IX.
supplementary essential variables). One or more combinations of welding processes, filler
(d) Format of the WPS. The information required to be metal, and other variables may be used when welding a
in the WPS may be in any format, written or tabular, to fit test coupon. The approximate thickness of weld metal
the needs of each organization, as long as every essential, deposited, excluding weld reinforcement, shall be
nonessential, and, when required, supplementary essen- recorded for each set of essential and, when required,
tial variables outlined in QW-250 is included or refer- supplementary essential variables. Weld metal deposited
enced. using each set of variables shall be included in the tension,
Form QW-482 (see Nonmandatory Appendix B) has bend, toughness, and other mechanical test specimens
been provided as a guide for the WPS. This Form includes that are required.
the required data for the SMAW, SAW, GMAW, and GTAW (c) Changes to the PQR. Changes to the PQR are not
processes. It is only a guide and does not list all required permitted except as described below. Editorial correc-
data for other processes. It also lists some variables that do tions or addenda to the PQR are permitted. An
not apply to all processes (e.g., listing shielding gas which example of an editorial correction is an incorrect P-
is not required for SAW). The guide does not easily lend Number, F-Number, or A-Number that was assigned to
itself to multiple process procedure specification (e.g., a particular base metal or filler metal. An example of
GTAW root with SMAW fill). an addendum would be a change resulting from a

29
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Code change. For example, Section IX may assign a new F- properties, and service requirements. Where toughness is
Number to a filler metal or adopt a new filler metal under a consideration, it is presupposed that the base metals
an established F-Number. This may permit, depending on meet the specific requirements.
the particular construction Code requirements, an orga- In general, toughness requirements are mandatory for
nization to use other filler metals that fall within that parti- all P-No. 11 quenched and tempered metals, for low
cular F-Number where, prior to the Code revision, the temperature applications of other metals as applied to
organization was limited to the particular electrode clas- Section VIII, and for various classes of construction
sification that was used during qualification. Additional required by Section III. Acceptance criteria for the tough-
information can be incorporated into a PQR at a later ness tests are as established in the other Sections of the
date provided the information is substantiated as Code.
having been part of the original qualification condition
by lab record or similar data. QW-200.4 Combination of Welding Procedures.
All changes to a PQR require recertification (including (a) More than one WPS having different essential,
date) by the organization. supplementary essential, or nonessential variables may
(d) Format of the PQR. Form QW-483 (see be used in a single production joint. Each WPS may
Nonmandatory Appendix B) has been provided as a include one or a combination of processes, filler
guide for the PQR. The information required to be in metals, or other variables. These provisions also apply
the PQR may be in any format to fit the needs of each to special process WPSs as defined in QW-251.4.
organization. Every essential and, when required, supple- Where more than one WPS specifying different
mentary essential variable described in QW-250 shall be processes, filler metals, or other essential or supplemen-
included in the PQR. Also, the type of tests, number of tests, tary essential variables is used, QW-451 or Table QW-453,
and test results shall be listed in the PQR. as applicable, shall be used to determine the range of base
Form QW-483 does not easily lend itself to cover combi- metal thickness and maximum weld metal thickness qual-
nations of welding processes or more than one F-Number ified for each process, filler metal, or set of variables, and
filler metal in one test coupon. Additional sketches or those limits shall be observed.
information may be attached or referenced to record When following a WPS that has more than one welding
the required variables. process, filler metal, or set of variables, each process, filler
(e) Availability of the PQR. The PQR shall be available for metal, or set of variables may be used individually or in
review but need not be made available to the welder or different combinations, provided
welding operator. (1) the essential, nonessential, and required supple-
(f) Multiple WPSs With One PQR or Multiple PQRs With mentary essential variables associated with the process,
One WPS. Several WPSs may be prepared from the data on filler metal, or set of variables are applied
a single PQR (e.g., a 1G plate PQR may support WPSs for the (2) the base metal and deposited weld metal thick-
F, V, H, and O positions on plate or pipe within all other ness limits of QW-451 or Table QW-453, as applicable, for
essential variables). A single WPS may cover several sets each process, filler metal, or set of variables are applied
of essential variable ranges as long as a supporting PQR (b) As an alternative to (a), a production weld may be
exists for each essential and, when required, supplemen- made using a WPS that is supported by more than one PQR,
tary essential variable [e.g., a single WPS may cover a provided the following conditions are met:
thickness range from 1∕16 in. (1.5 mm) through 11∕4 in. (1) All PQRs were qualified
(32 mm) if PQRs exist for both the 1 ∕16 in. (1.5 mm) (-a) with GTAW, SMAW, GMAW, FCAW, PAW,
through 3 ∕ 16 in. (5 mm) and 3 ∕ 16 in. (5 mm) through LBW, LLBW, or SAW, or combinations of these processes
11∕4 in. (32 mm) thickness ranges]. (-b) on test coupons at least 1∕2 in. (13 mm) thick
QW-200.3 To reduce the number of welding procedure (2) Note (1) of Tables QW-451.1 and QW-451.2 shall
qualifications required, P-Numbers are assigned to base apply to the WPS. The WPS may be used to deposit
metals dependent on characteristics such as composition, (-a) root layers with the process or combinations
weldability, and mechanical properties, where this can of processes on one PQR for weld metal deposits up to 2t
logically be done; and for steel and steel alloys (see (-b) fill layers with the process(es) on the other
Table QW/QB-422) Group Numbers are assigned addi- PQR(s) on base metal up to the maximum thickness qual-
tionally to P-Numbers. These Group Numbers classify ified by the other PQR(s)
the metals within P-Numbers for the purpose of procedure
qualification where toughness requirements are specified. QW-201 ORGANIZATIONAL RESPONSIBILITY
The assignments do not imply that base metals may be The organization shall certify that they have qualified
indiscriminately substituted for a base metal which each Welding Procedure Specification, performed the
was used in the qualification test without consideration procedure qualification test, and documented it with
of the compatibility from the standpoint of metallurgical the necessary Procedure Qualification Record (PQR).
properties, postweld heat treatment, design, mechanical

30
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-202 TYPE OF TESTS REQUIRED range shall be based on the base metal thickness adjacent
to the toe of the weld at the thinnest end of the transition.
QW-202.1 Mechanical Tests. The type and number of The test specimens for tensile and bend tests may be
test specimens that shall be tested to qualify a groove weld machined to the thickness required for the thinner
procedure are given in QW-451, and shall be removed in a base metal prior to testing.
manner similar to that shown in Figures QW-463.1(a) (b) Qualification for Partial Penetration Groove Welds.
through QW-463.1(f). If any test specimen required by Partial penetration groove welds shall be qualified in
QW-451 fails to meet the applicable acceptance criteria, accordance with the requirements of QW-451 for both
the test coupon shall be considered as failed. base metal and deposited weld metal thickness, except
When it can be determined that the cause of failure is not there need be no upper limit on the base metal thickness
related to welding parameters, another test coupon may provided qualification was made on base metal having a
be welded using identical welding parameters. thickness of 11∕2 in. (38 mm) or more. When dissimilar
Alternatively, if adequate material of the original test thickness test coupons are welded, the provisions of
coupon exists, additional test specimens may be (a) for dissimilar thickness test coupons shall be met.
removed as close as practicable to the original specimen (c) Qualification for Fillet Welds. WPS qualification for
location to replace the failed test specimens. fillet welds shall be made on groove-weld test coupons
When it has been determined that the test failure was using test specimens specified in (a) or (b). These quali-
caused by an essential or supplementary essential vari- fications may be used for welding all thicknesses of base
able, a new test coupon may be welded with appropriate metal for all sizes of fillet welds, and all diameters of pipe
changes to the variable(s) that was determined to cause or tube in accordance with Table QW-451.4. Non-pres-
the test failure. If the new test passes, the essential and sure-retaining fillet welds, as defined in other Sections
supplementary essential variables shall be documented of the Code, may as an alternate be qualified with fillet
on the PQR. weld qualification tests. Tests shall be made in accordance
When it is determined that the test failure was caused by with QW-180. Limits of qualification shall be in accor-
one or more welding related factors other than essential or dance with Table QW-451.3.
supplementary essential variables, a new test coupon may
be welded with the appropriate changes to the welding QW-202.3 Weld Repair and Buildup. WPS qualified on
related factors that were determined to cause the test groove welds shall be applicable for weld repairs to groove
failure. If the new test passes, the welding related and fillet welds and for weld buildup under the following
factors that were determined to cause the previous provisions:
test failure shall be addressed by the organization to (a) There is no limitation on the thickness of base metal
ensure that the required properties are achieved in the or deposited weld metal for fillet welds.
production weldment. (b) For other than fillet welds, the thickness range for
Where qualification is for fillet welds only, the require- base metal and deposited weld metal for each welding
ments are given in QW-202.2(c); and where qualification process shall be in accordance with QW-451, except
is for stud welds only, the requirements are given in there need be no upper limit on the base metal thickness
QW-202.5. provided qualification was made on base metal having a
thickness of 11∕2 in. (38 mm) or more.
QW-202.2 Groove and Fillet Welds.
QW-202.4 Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses. WPS ð23Þ
(a) Qualification for Groove Full Penetration Welds. qualified on groove welds shall be applicable for produc-
Groove-weld test coupons shall qualify the thickness tion welds between dissimilar base metal thicknesses
ranges of both base metal and deposited weld metal to provided:
be used in production. Limits of qualification shall be (a) the thickness of the thinner member shall be within
in accordance with QW-451. The thickness, t, of deposited the range permitted by QW-451
weld metal in QW-451 shall be exclusive of weld reinforce- (b) the thickness of the thicker member shall be as
ment. WPS qualification for groove welds shall be made on follows:
groove welds using tension and guided-bend specimens. (1) For P-No. 8, P-No. 41, P-No. 42, P-No. 43, P-No. 44,
Toughness tests shall be made when required by other P-No. 45, P-No. 46, P-No. 49, P-No. 51, P-No. 52, P-No. 53, P-
Section(s) of the Code. The WPS shall be qualified for No. 61, and P-No. 62 metal, there shall be no limitation on
use with groove welds within the range of essential vari- the maximum thickness of the thicker production member
ables listed. provided qualification was made on base metal having a
When dissimilar thickness test coupons are welded, the thickness of 1∕4 in. (6 mm) or greater.
“Range of Thickness T of Base Metal, Qualified” in QW-451 (2) For all other metal, the thickness of the thicker
shall be determined individually for each base metal in the member shall be within the range permitted by QW-451,
test coupon. When the thicker test coupon is tapered to except there need be no limitation on the maximum thick-
provide a thickness transition at the weld, the qualified ness of the thicker production member provided

31
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

qualification was made on base metal having a thickness of QW-212 TYPE AND DIMENSIONS OF GROOVE
11∕2 in. (38 mm) or more. WELDS
More than one procedure qualification may be required
to qualify for some dissimilar thickness combinations. Except as otherwise provided in QW-250, the type and
dimensions of the welding groove are not essential vari-
QW-202.5 Stud Welding. Procedure qualification tests ables.
for stud welds shall be made in accordance with QW-192.
The procedure qualification tests shall qualify the welding QW-214 CORROSION-RESISTANT WELD METAL
procedures for use within the range of the essential vari- OVERLAY
ables of Table QW-261. Except for studs used for extended
heating surfaces and studs welded to P-No. 1 metals, five QW-214.1 The size of test coupons, limits of qualifica-
additional welds shall be made and subjected to a macro- tion, required examinations and tests, and test specimens
test in accordance with QW-192.1.4 shall be as specified in QW-214.2 and Table QW-453.

QW-202.6 Tube-to-Tubesheet Qualification. When QW-214.2 The qualification test coupon for procedure ð23Þ
the applicable Code Section requires the use of qualification shall consist of base metal not less than 6 in.
QW-193 for tube-to-tubesheet demonstration mockup (150 mm) × 6 in. (150 mm). The weld overlay cladding
qualification tests, QW-193.1 shall apply. If specific quali- shall be a minimum of 11∕2 in. (38 mm) wide by approxi-
fication test requirements are not specified by the appli- mately 6 in. (150 mm) long. For qualification on pipe, the
cable Code Section, tube-to-tubesheet welds shall be pipe length shall be a minimum of 6 in. (150 mm) and the
qualified with one of the following methods: diameter shall be the minimum needed to allow the
(a) groove welds per the requirements of QW-202.2 required number of test specimens. The weld overlay
and QW-202.4 shall be continuous around the circumference of the
(b) a demonstration mockup per the requirements of test coupon.
QW-193.1 (a) The corrosion-resistant surface shall be examined
(c) fillet welds per the requirements of QW-202.2(c) by the liquid penetrant method and shall meet the require-
(for non-pressure-retaining tube-to-tubesheet welds ments specified in QW-195.
only) (b) Following the liquid penetrant examination, four
guided side-bend tests shall be made from the test
QW-203 LIMITS OF QUALIFIED POSITIONS FOR coupon in accordance with QW-161. The test specimens
PROCEDURES shall be cut so that there are either two specimens parallel
and two specimens perpendicular to the direction of the
Unless specifically required otherwise by the welding welding, or four specimens perpendicular to the direction
variables (see QW-250), a qualification in any position of the welding. For coupons that are less than 3∕8 in. (10
qualifies the procedure for all positions. The welding mm) thick, the width of the side-bend specimens may be
process and electrodes must be suitable for use in the posi- reduced to the thickness of the test coupon. The side-bend
tions permitted by the WPS. A welder or welding operator specimens shall be removed from locations specified in
making and passing the WPS qualification test is qualified Figure QW-462.5(c) or Figure QW-462.5(d).
for the position tested. see QW-301.2. (c) When a chemical composition is specified in the
WPS, chemical analysis specimens shall be removed at
QW-210 PREPARATION OF TEST COUPON locations specified in Figure QW-462.5(b) or Figure
QW-462.5(e). The chemical analysis shall be performed
QW-211 BASE METAL in accordance with Figure QW-462.5(a) and shall be
within the range specified in the WPS. This chemical
The base metals may consist of either plate, pipe, or
analysis is not required when a chemical composition
other product forms. Qualification in plate also qualifies
is not specified on the WPS.
for pipe welding and vice versa. The dimensions of the test
coupon shall be sufficient to provide the required test QW-214.3 Essential variables shall be as specified in
specimens. QW-250 for the applicable welding process.
QW-211.1 A weld metal overlay deposited on the base
QW-215 ELECTRON BEAM WELDING, LASER BEAM
metal following a qualified WPS may be considered as the
same P-Number as any base metal having a nominally
WELDING, AND LOW-POWER DENSITY
matching chemical analysis. LASER BEAM WELDING
QW-215.1 For electron beam welding and laser beam
welding (excluding low-power density laser beam
welding), the WPS qualification test coupon shall be
prepared with the joint geometry duplicating that to
be used in production. If the production weld is to

32
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

include a lap-over (completing the weld by rewelding over (2) the geometric configuration and dimensions of
the starting area of the weld, as for a girth weld), such lap- the production parts at the weld joint
over shall be included in the WPS qualification test (3) a photomicrograph of at least one cross section
coupon. (4) the observed depth of weld-joint penetration,
measured to within 0.01 in. (0.3 mm), for all four
QW-215.2 The mechanical testing requirements of
cross sections
QW-451 shall apply.
(f) A workmanship WPS shall be prepared based on the
QW-215.3 Essential variables shall be as specified in workmanship PQR and shall include the information listed
Tables QW-260, QW-264, and QW-264.2 for the applicable in (1) through (4).
welding process. (1) reference to the previously qualified groove-
weld PQR and the workmanship PQR
QW-215.4 A laser beam WPS or electron beam WPS
(2) the essential variable ranges based on the
previously qualified in accordance with QW-215.1
observed and recorded information on the workmanship
through QW-215.3 for groove welds may be further qual-
PQR
ified for depositing partial-penetration groove welds
(3) the geometric configuration and dimensions of
provided the following conditions are met:
the production parts to be welded
(a) The partial-penetration groove welds are deposited
(4) the minimum required depth of weld penetration
in P-No. 8, P-No. 41, P-No. 42, P-No. 43, P-No. 44, P-No. 45,
(g) When more than one workmanship PQR has been
P-No. 46, P-No. 49, P-No. 51, P-No. 52, P-No. 53, P-No. 61, or
developed to address different configurations of the
P-No. 62 metals or any combination of these metals.
production parts, a separate workmanship WPS shall
(b) A workmanship test coupon is prepared following
be prepared for each of the production configurations
the previously qualified WPS, with the following excep-
to be welded.
tions:
(1) The workmanship test coupon shall consist of QW-216 HARD-FACING WELD METAL OVERLAY
production parts joined by a partial-penetration groove
weld with a joint geometry and dimensions falling Hard-facing weld metal overlay refers to weld deposits
within the specified tolerances of the production weld. made, using a variety of processes, to deter the effects of
(2) For electron beam welding, the following vari- wear and/or abrasion. The requirements specified in
ables may be revised from those given in the previously QW-216.1 through QW-216.5 apply regardless of which
qualified WPS: QW-402.6, QW-404.1, QW-404.8 (change hard-facing process is used.
in amount only), QW-409.6, QW-409.7, and QW-410.7. QW-216.1 The size of test coupons, limits of qualifica-
(3) For laser beam welding, the following variables tion, required examinations and tests, and test specimens
may be revised from those given in the previously qual- shall be as specified in Table QW-453.
ified WPS: QW-402.26, QW-403.3, QW-404.8 (change in
amount only), QW-408.12, QW-409.21, QW-410.7, QW-216.2 The test base metal coupon for procedure ð23Þ
QW-410.14, QW-410.37, QW-410.66, and QW-410.80. qualification shall have minimum dimensions of 6 in. (150
(c) A minimum of four cross sections of the partial- mm) wide × approximately 6 in. (150 mm) long with a
penetration groove weld in each workmanship test hard-faced layer a minimum of 11∕2 in. (38 mm) wide ×
coupon shall be sectioned, polished, and etched with a 6 in. (150 mm) long. The minimum hard-faced thickness
suitable etchant to reveal the weld and heat-affected shall be as specified in the WPS. Alternatively, the quali-
zone (see QW-470). If the workmanship test coupon fication may be performed on a test base metal coupon
includes a lap-over, then one of the cross sections shall that represents the size of the production part. For quali-
be taken from that location. fication on pipe, the pipe length shall be 6 in. (150 mm)
(d) The workmanship test coupon shall be acceptable minimum and the diameter shall be the minimum needed
when the weld and heat-affected zones of each cross to allow the required number of test specimens. The weld
section exhibit complete fusion and are free of cracks overlay shall be continuous around the circumference of
when visually examined at 10X magnification. Any indica- the test coupon.
tions 1∕32 in. (0.8 mm) in length at the root of the weld may (a) The hard-facing surface shall be examined by the
be disregarded. The depth of penetration of each cross liquid penetrant method and shall meet the acceptance
section shall be measured to within 0.01 in. (0.3 mm) standards in QW-195.2 or as specified in the WPS.
and shall meet the specified production requirements. Liquid penetrant examiners shall meet the requirements
(e) A workmanship PQR shall be prepared to document in QW-195.3. Surface conditioning prior to liquid pene-
the workmanship test and shall include the information trant examination is permitted.
listed in (1) through (4). (b) After surface conditioning to the minimum thick-
(1) the essential variables observed when preparing ness specified in the WPS, a minimum of three hardness
the workmanship test coupon readings shall be made on each of the specimens from the
locations shown in Figure QW-462.5(b) or Figure

33
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-462.5(e). All readings shall meet the requirements of metal and cladding) as applied to QW-451, except that the
the WPS. minimum thickness of filler metal joining the cladding
(c) The base metal shall be sectioned transversely to portion of the weldment shall be based on a chemical
the direction of the hard-facing overlay. The two faces analysis performed in accordance with QW-216.2(d).
of the hard facing exposed by sectioning shall be polished (4) The groove weld tension and side-bend test
and etched with a suitable etchant and shall be visually specimens (only type bend specimens permitted for
examined with 5X magnification for cracks in the base this method) and number required by QW-451 shall
metal or the heat-affected zone, lack of fusion, or other contain as much of the full thickness base metal and clad-
linear defects. The overlay and base metal shall meet ding thickness in the tested portion of the specimens as
the requirements specified in the WPS. All exposed possible.
faces shall be examined. See Figure QW-462.5(b) for (5) The acceptance criteria for tensile tests shall be
pipe and Figure QW-462.5(e) for plate. based on the tensile strength of the P-Number or unas-
(d) When a chemical composition is specified in the signed base metal applied to the full thickness of the
WPS, chemical analysis specimens shall be removed at test coupon to the requirements of QW-151.1(a),
locations specified in Figure QW-462.5(b) or Figure QW-151.1(b), or QW-151.1(c), unless specified otherwise
QW-462.5(e). The chemical analysis shall be performed by the applicable Construction Code.
in accordance with Figure QW-462.5(a) and shall be (6) The bend test requirements and acceptance
within the range specified in the WPS. This chemical criteria for side-bend specimens shall be according to
analysis is not required when a chemical composition QW-162 and QW-163. For the side-bend specimens,
is not specified on the WPS. the bond line between the original cladding and base
metal may be disregarded when evaluating the tested
QW-216.3 Welding variables shall be as specified in
bend specimens if the cladding was applied by a
QW-250 for the applicable process.
process other than fusion welding.
QW-216.4 Where Spray Fuse methods of hard facing (b) Method B.
(e.g., Oxyfuel and Plasma Arc) are to be used, the coupons (1) The essential and nonessential variables of
for these methods shall be prepared and welding variables QW-250 shall apply for each welding process used in
applied in accordance with QW-216.1 and QW-216.3, production for joining the base metal portion of the weld-
respectively. ment. The PQRs that support this portion of the WPS need
not be based on test coupons made with clad metal. For the
QW-216.5 If a weld deposit is to be used under a hard-
corrosion-resistant overlay portion of the weld, the essen-
facing weld metal overlay, a base metal with an assigned P-
tial variables of QW-251.4 shall apply and the test coupon
Number and a chemical analysis nominally matching the
and testing shall be in accordance with Table QW-453. The
weld deposit chemical analysis may be substituted to
WPS shall limit the depth of the groove, which will receive
qualify the PQR.
the corrosion-resistant overlay in order to ensure devel-
ð23Þ QW-217 JOINING OF CLAD MATERIALS opment of the full strength of the underlying weld in the
base metal.
The WPS for groove welds in clad metal shall be qual- (2) For qualification of single-sided joints in which
ified by method A [see (a)] when any part of the cladding cladding is located at the root area, separate qualification
thickness, as permitted by the referencing Code Section, is for base metal and cladding according to QW-202.2 may be
included in the design calculations. Either method A [see performed. Alternatively, qualification using clad material
(a)] or method B [see (b)] may be used when the cladding may be made according to rules in method A with the
thickness is not included in the design calculations. following exceptions:
(a) Method A. (-a) The qualified thickness range for the base
(1) The essential and nonessential variables of metals (P-Number or unassigned base metal and cladding)
QW-250 shall apply for each welding process used in and filler metals used to weld each material shall be based
production. on the actual test coupon thickness for each material (base
(2) The clad material (base metal with cladding) metal and cladding) as applied to QW-451.
procedure qualification test coupon shall be made (-b) The tensile specimens shall not contain the
using the same P-Number or unassigned base metal, clad- clad portion of the test coupon.
ding (major alloying elements nominal chemical composi- (-c) The acceptance criteria for the tensile test
tion), welding process(es), and filler metal combinations shall be based on the tensile strength of the P-Number
to be specified in the WPS. or the unassigned base metal.
(3) The qualified thickness range for the base metals (-d) The chemical analysis, if required, shall be
(P-Number or unassigned base metal and cladding) and performed in accordance with QW-216.2(d).
filler metal(s) used to weld each material shall be based on (-e) The variables of QW-250 apply to the base
the actual test coupon thickness for each material (base metal, cladding, and filler metal.

34
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-218 APPLIED LININGS Production tests conducted in accordance with the re-
quirements of other Sections may be used to satisfy this
QW-218.1 WPSs for attaching applied linings shall be requirement.
qualified in accordance with QW-202.2(a), QW-202.2(b),
or QW-202.2(c).
QW-220 HYBRID WELDING PROCEDURE
ð23Þ QW-218.2 As an alternative to the above, each process VARIABLES
to be used in attaching applied linings to base metal shall
be qualified on a test coupon welded into the form and Requirements of QW-221 through QW-223 shall be
arrangement to be used in construction using materials observed for all hybrid welding procedure qualifications.
that are within the range of chemical composition of the
metal to be used for the base plate, the lining, and the weld QW-221 ESSENTIAL VARIABLES FOR HYBRID
metal. The welding variables of QW-250 shall apply except WELDING
for those regarding base metal or weld metal thickness. The following essential variables are in addition to the
Qualification in any position qualifies the procedure for all welding variables for each welding process used during
positions. One cross section for each position tested shall hybrid welding provided in QW-250:
be sectioned, polished, and etched to clearly show the (a) an addition or deletion of welding processes used in
demarcation between the base metal and the weld a hybrid welding process from those used during quali-
metal. In order to be acceptable, each specimen shall fication.
exhibit complete fusion of the weld metal with the (b) a change in the process sequence used in a hybrid
base metal and freedom from cracks. welding process from that used during qualification.
QW-218.3 When chemical analysis of the weld deposit (c) a change in the process separation used in a hybrid
for any elements is required, a chemical analysis shall be welding process greater than 10% from that used during
performed per QW-216.2(d) for those elements. qualification (e.g., measured at the weld surface, measured
between the welding torch and laser, etc.)
QW-219 FLASH WELDING (d) a change in any angle, between each individual
welding process used in a hybrid welding process or a
Flash welding shall be limited to automatic electrical
change in any angle between the hybrid welding
resistance flash welding. Procedure qualification tests
process and the material to be welded, of greater than
shall be conducted in accordance with QW-199.1.
10 deg from that used during qualification.
QW-219.1 Tolerances on Variables. Flash welding (e) a change in the height between the individual
variables that may require adjustment during production welding processes used in a hybrid welding process
welding are synergistically related. Accordingly, even and the material surface or a change in the height
though the variables shown in Table QW-265 provide between the hybrid welding process and the material
tolerances on many welding variables, the WPS shall surface greater than 10% from that used during qualifica-
specify the same specific variables shown on the PQR tion.
with tolerance shown for no more than one variable
(e.g., if it is desired to provide a tolerance on the upset QW-222 WELDING PROCESS RESTRICTIONS
current, all other variables shown on the WPS must be The hybrid welding process shall be limited to machine
the same as they are shown on the PQR). If it is or automatic welding.
desired to provide tolerances in the WPS for two variables,
the first variable with a tolerance shall be set at the QW-223 TEST COUPON PREPARATION AND
midpoint of its tolerance and two test coupons shall be TESTING
welded with each of the upper and lower extremes of
the tolerance for the second variable (i.e., four coupons The hybrid welding procedure qualification test coupon
must be welded). These coupons shall be examined shall be prepared in accordance with the rules in QW-210
and tested in accordance with QW-199.1.3. and tested in accordance with the rules in QW-202.
If it is desired to provide tolerance for a third variable,
the first two variables shall be set at the midpoint of their QW-250 WELDING VARIABLES
tolerance, and two test coupons shall be welded with each
of the upper and lower extremes of the new tolerances for QW-251 GENERAL
the third variable (i.e., four coupons must be welded).
QW-251.1 Types of Variables for Welding Procedure
These coupons shall be examined and tested in accordance
Specifications (WPS). These variables (listed for each
with QW-199.1.3.
welding process in Tables QW-252 through QW-267)
No more than three essential variables on a WPS may
are subdivided into essential variables, supplementary
show tolerances.
essential variables, and nonessential variables (see

35
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-401). The “Brief of Variables” listed in the tables are QW-251.3 Nonessential Variables. Nonessential vari-
for reference only. See the complete variable in Welding ables are those in which a change, as described in the spe-
Data of Article IV. cific variables, may be made in the WPS without
requalification.
QW-251.2 Essential Variables. Essential variables are
those in which a change, as described in the specific vari- QW-251.4 Special Processes. ð23Þ
ables, is considered to affect the mechanical properties of
the weldment and therefore shall require requalification (a) The special process essential variables for corro-
of the WPS. sion-resistant and hard-facing weld metal overlays are
Supplementary essential variables are required for as indicated in the following tables for the specified
metals for which the referencing code, standard, or spec- process. Only the variables specified for special processes
ification requires toughness tests and are in addition to the shall apply. A change in the corrosion-resistant or hard-
essential variables for each welding process. facing welding process shall require requalification.
When toughness requirements are invoked by a refer- (b) WPS qualified for corrosion-resistant and hard-
encing code, standard, or specification, the supplementary facing overlay welding, in accordance with other Sections
essential variables are applicable to both groove and fillet when such qualification rules were included in those
welds. Sections, may be used with the same provisions as
provided in QG-101.

36
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-252
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Oxyfuel Gas Welding (OFW)
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .1 ϕ Groove design X
Joints .2 ± Backing X
.3 ϕ Backing comp. X
.10 ϕ Root spacing X
QW-403 .1 ϕ P-Number X
Base Metals .2 Max. T Qualified X
QW-404 .3 ϕ Size X
Filler Metals .4 ϕ F-Number X
.5 ϕ A-Number X
.12 ϕ Classification X
QW-405 .1 + Position X
Positions
QW-406 .1 Decrease > 100°F (55°C) X
Preheat
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT
QW-408 .7 ϕ Type fuel gas X
Gas
QW-410 .1 ϕ String or weave X
Technique .2 ϕ Flame characteristics X
.4 ϕ Technique X

.5 ϕ Method cleaning X
.26 ± Peening X
.64 … Use of thermal processes X
Legend:

+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change

− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

37
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-252.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Oxyfuel Gas Welding (OFW)
Special Process Essential Variables
Hard-Facing Overlay Corrosion-Resistant Overlay Hard-Facing Spray Fuse
Paragraph (See QW-216) (See QW-214) (See QW-216)
QW-402 .16 < Finished t
Joint .17 > Finished t
QW-403 .20 ϕ P-Number ϕ P-Number
Base Metals .23 ϕ T Qualified ϕ T Qualified ϕ T Qualified
QW-404 .12 ϕ Classification ϕ Classification
Filler Metals .42 > 5% Particle size range
.46 ϕ Powder feed rate
QW-405 .4 + Position + Position
Positions
QW-406 .4 Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat
Preheat > Interpass > Interpass
.5 ϕ Preheat maint.
QW-407 .6 ϕ PWHT ϕ PWHT
PWHT .7 ϕ PWHT after fusing
QW-408 .7 ϕ Type of fuel gas
Gas .14 ϕ Oxyfuel gas pressure
.16 ϕ > 5% Gas feed rate
.19 ϕ Plasma or feed gas comp.
QW-410 .38 ϕ Multiple to single layer ϕ Multiple to single layer
Technique .39 ϕ Torch type, tip sizer
.44 ϕ > 15% Torch to workpiece
.45 ϕ Surface prep.
.46 ϕ Spray torch
.47 ϕ > 10% Fusing temp. or method
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

38
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-253
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Shielded Metal-Arc Welding (SMAW) ð23Þ

Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .1 ϕ Groove design X
Joints .4 − Backing X
.10 ϕ Root spacing X
.11 ± Retainers X
QW-403 .5 ϕ Group Number X
Base Metals .6 T Limits toughness X
.8 ϕ T Qualified X
.9 t Pass > 1∕2 in. (13 mm) X
.11 ϕ P-No. qualified X
QW-404 .4 ϕ F-Number X
Filler Metals .5 ϕ A-Number X
.6 ϕ Diameter X
.12 ϕ Classification X
.30 ϕ t X
.33 ϕ Classification X
QW-405 .1 + Position X
Positions .3 ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding X
QW-406 .1 Decrease > 100°F (55°C) X
Preheat .2 ϕ Preheat maint. X
.3 Increase > 100°F (55°C) (IP) X
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT .2 ϕ PWHT (T&T range) X
QW-409 .1 > Heat input X
Electrical Characteristics .4 ϕ Current or polarity X
.8 ϕ I&E range X
.30 ϕ Current or polarity X
QW-410 .1 ϕ String or weave X
Technique .5 ϕ Method cleaning X
.6 ϕ Method back gouge X
.9 ϕ Multiple to single pass/side X
.25 ϕ Manual or automatic X
.26 ± Peening X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
.87 ϕ Multiple to single pass/side X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

39
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-253.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Shielded Metal-Arc Welding (SMAW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Corrosion-Resistant Overlay
Hard-Facing Overlay (HFO) (CRO) Nonessential Variables
Paragraph (See QW-216) (See QW-214) for HFO and CRO
QW-402 .16 < Finished t < Finished t
Joints
QW-403 .20 ϕ P-Number ϕ P-Number
Base Metals .23 ϕ T Qualified ϕ T Qualified
QW-404 .12 ϕ Classification
Filler Metals .37 ϕ A-Number
.38 ϕ Diameter (1st layer)
QW-405 .4 + Position + Position
Positions
QW-406 .4 Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat > Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat >
Preheat Interpass Interpass
QW-407 .6 ϕ PWHT
PWHT .9 ϕ PWHT
QW-409 .4 ϕ Current or polarity ϕ Current or polarity
Electrical .8 ϕ I&E range
Characteristics
.22 Inc. > 10% 1st layer Inc. > 10% 1st layer
QW-410 .1 ϕ String or weave
Technique .5 ϕ Method of cleaning
.26 ± Peening
.38 ϕ Multiple to single layer ϕ Multiple to single layer
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

40
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-254
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Submerged-Arc Welding (SAW) ð23Þ

Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .1 ϕ Groove design X
Joints .4 − Backing X
.10 ϕ Root spacing X
.11 ± Retainers X
QW-403 .5 ϕ Group Number X
Base Metals .6 T Limits X
.8 ϕ T Qualified X
.9 t Pass 1∕2 in. (13 mm) X
.11 ϕ P-No. qualified X
QW-404 .4 ϕ F-Number X
Filler Metals .5 ϕ A-Number X
.6 ϕ Diameter X
.9 ϕ Flux-wire class. X
.10 ϕ Alloy flux X
.24 ± or ϕ Supplemental X
.27 ϕ Alloy elements X
.29 ϕ Flux designation X
.30 ϕ t X
.33 ϕ Classification X
.34 ϕ Flux type X
.35 ϕ Flux-wire class. X X
.36 Recrushed slag X
QW-405 .1 + Position X
Positions
QW-406 .1 Decrease > 100°F (55°C) X
Preheat .2 ϕ Preheat maint. X
.3 Increase > 100°F (55°C) (IP) X
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT .2 ϕ PWHT (T&T range) X
QW-409 .1 > Heat input X
Electrical Characteristics .4 ϕ Current or polarity X
.8 ϕ I&E range X
.30 ϕ Current or polarity X
QW-410 .1 ϕ String or weave X
Technique .5 ϕ Method cleaning X
.6 ϕ Method back gouge X
.7 ϕ Oscillation X
.8 ϕ Tube-work distance X
.9 ϕ Multi to single pass per side X
.10 ϕ Single to multi electrodes X X
.15 ϕ Electrode spacing X
.25 ϕ Manual or automatic X
.26 ± Peening X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
.87 ϕ Multiple to single pass/side X

41
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-254
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Submerged-Arc Welding (SAW) (Cont’d)

Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

42
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-254.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Submerged-Arc Welding (SAW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Hard-Facing Overlay (HFO) Corrosion-Resistant Overlay Nonessential Variables for HFO
Paragraph (See QW-216) (CRO) (See QW-214) and CRO
QW-402 .16 < Finished t < Finished t
Joints
QW-403 .20 ϕ P-Number ϕ P-Number
Base Metals .23 ϕ T Qualified ϕ T Qualified
QW-404 .6 ϕ Nominal size of electrode
Filler Metals .12 ϕ Classification
.24 ± or ϕ > 10% in supplemental ± or ϕ > 10% in supplemental
filler metal filler metal
.27 ϕ Alloy elements
.37 ϕ A-Number
.39 ϕ Nominal flux comp. ϕ Nominal flux comp.
.57 > Strip thickness or width > Strip thickness or width
QW-405 .4 + Position + Position
Positions
QW-406 .4 Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat > Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat >
Preheat Interpass Interpass
QW-407 .6 ϕ PWHT
PWHT .9 ϕ PWHT
QW-409 .4 ϕ Current or polarity ϕ Current or polarity
Electrical .8 ϕ I&E range
Characteristics
.26 1st layer — Heat input > 10% 1st layer — Heat input > 10%
QW-410 .1 ϕ String or weave
Technique .5 ϕ Method of cleaning
.7 ϕ Oscillation
.8 ϕ Tube to work distance
.15 ϕ Electrode spacing
.25 ϕ Manual or automatic
.26 ± Peening
.38 ϕ Multiple to single layer ϕ Multiple to single layer
.40 − Supplemental device
.50 ϕ No. of electrodes ϕ No. of electrodes
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

43
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-255
ð23Þ Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Metal-Arc Welding (GMAW and FCAW)
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .1 ϕ Groove design X
Joints .4 − Backing X
.10 ϕ Root spacing X
.11 ± Retainers X
QW-403 .5 ϕ Group Number X
Base Metals .6 T Limits X
.8 ϕ T Qualified X
.9 t Pass > 1∕2 in. (13 mm) X
.11 ϕ P-No. qualified X
QW-404 .4 ϕ F-Number X
Filler Metals .5 ϕ A-Number X
.6 ϕ Diameter X
.12 ϕ Classification X
.23 ϕ Filler metal product form X
.24 ± or ϕ Supplemental X
.27 ϕ Alloy elements X
.30 ϕ t X
.33 ϕ Classification X
QW-405 .1 + Position X
Positions .3 ϕ ↑ ↓ Vertical welding X
QW-406 .1 Decrease > 100°F (55°C) X
Preheat .2 ϕ Preheat maint. X
.3 Increase > 100°F (55°C) (IP) X
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT .2 ϕ PWHT (T&T range) X
QW-408 .1 ± Trail or ϕ comp. X
Gas .2 ϕ Single, mixture, or % X
.3 ϕ Flow rate X
.5 ± or ϕ Backing flow X
.9 − Backing or ϕ comp. X
.10 − Trail or ϕ comp. X
QW-409 .1 > Heat input X
Electrical Characteristics .4 ϕ Current or polarity X
.8 ϕ I&E range X
.30 ϕ Current or polarity X
.32 ϕ Transfer mode X

44
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-255
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Metal-Arc Welding (GMAW and FCAW) (Cont’d)
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-410 .1 ϕ String or weave X
Technique .3 ϕ Orifice, cup, or nozzle size X
.5 ϕ Method cleaning X
.6 ϕ Method back gouge X
.7 ϕ Oscillation X
.8 ϕ Tube-work distance X
.9 ϕ Multiple to single pass per side X
.10 ϕ Single to multiple electrodes X X
.15 ϕ Electrode spacing X
.25 ϕ Manual or automatic X
.26 ± Peening X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
.87 ϕ Multiple to single pass/side X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

45
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-255.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Metal-Arc Welding (GMAW and FCAW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Hard-Facing Overlay (HFO) Corrosion-Resistant Overlay Nonessential Variables for HFO
Paragraph (See QW-216) (CRO) (See QW-214) and CRO
QW-402 .16 < Finished t < Finished t
Joints
QW-403 .20 ϕ P-Number ϕ P-Number
Base Metals .23 ϕ T Qualified ϕ T Qualified
QW-404 .6 ϕ Nominal size of electrode
Filler Metals .12 ϕ Classification
.23 ϕ Filler metal product form ϕ Filler metal product form
.24 ± or ϕ > 10% in supplemental ± or ϕ > 10% in supplemental
filler metal filler metal
.27 ϕ Alloy elements
.37 ϕ A-Number
QW-405 .4 + Position + Position
Positions
QW-406 .4 Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat > Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat >
Preheat Interpass Interpass
QW-407 .6 ϕ PWHT
PWHT .9 ϕ PWHT
QW-408 .2 ϕ Single, mixture, or % ϕ Single, mixture, or %
Gas .3 ϕ Flow rate
QW-409 .4 ϕ Current or polarity ϕ Current or polarity
Electrical .8 ϕ I&E range
Characteristics
.26 1st layer — Heat input > 10% 1st layer — Heat input > 10%
QW-410 .1 ϕ String or weave
Technique .3 ϕ Orifice, cup, or nozzle size
.5 ϕ Method of cleaning
.7 ϕ Oscillation
.8 ϕ Tube to work distance
.25 ϕ Manual or automatic
.26 ± Peening
.38 ϕ Multiple to single layer ϕ Multiple to single layer
.50 ϕ No. of electrodes ϕ No. of electrodes
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

46
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-256
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding (GTAW) ð23Þ

Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .1 ϕ Groove design X
Joints .5 + Backing X
.10 ϕ Root spacing X
.11 ± Retainers X
QW-403 .5 ϕ Group Number X
Base Metals .6 T Limits X
.8 T Qualified X
.11 ϕ P-No. qualified X
QW-404 .3 ϕ Size X
Filler Metals .4 ϕ F-Number X
.5 ϕ A-Number X
.12 ϕ Classification X
.14 ± Filler X
.22 ± Consum. insert X
.23 ϕ Filler metal product form X
.30 ϕ t X
.33 ϕ Classification X
.50 ± Flux X
QW-405 .1 + Position X
Positions .3 ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding X
QW-406 .1 Decrease > 100°F (55°C) X
Preheat .3 Increase > 100°F (55°C) (IP) X
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT .2 ϕ PWHT (T&T range) X
QW-408 .1 ± Trail or ϕ comp. X
Gas .2 ϕ Single, mixture, or % X
.3 ϕ Flow rate X
.5 ± or ϕ Backing flow X
.9 − Backing or ϕ comp. X
.10 − Trail or ϕ comp. X
QW-409 .1 > Heat input X
Electrical Characteristics .3 ± Pulsing I X
.4 ϕ Current or polarity X
.8 ϕ I&E range X
.12 ϕ Tungsten electrode X
.30 ϕ Current or polarity X

47
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-256
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding (GTAW) (Cont’d)
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-410 .1 ϕ String or weave X
Technique .3 ϕ Orifice, cup, or nozzle size X
.5 ϕ Method cleaning X
.6 ϕ Method back gouge X
.7 ϕ Oscillation X
.9 ϕ Multi to single pass per side X
.10 ϕ Single to multi electrodes X X
.11 ϕ Closed to out chamber X
.15 ϕ Electrode spacing X
.25 ϕ Manual or automatic X
.26 ± Peening X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
.87 ϕ Multiple to single pass/side X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

48
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-256.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding (GTAW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Hard-Facing Overlay (HFO) Corrosion-Resistant Overlay Nonessential Variables
Paragraph (See QW-216) (CRO) (See QW-214) for HFO and CRO
QW-402 .16 < Finished t < Finished t
Joints
QW-403 .20 ϕ P-Number ϕ P-Number
Base Metals .23 ϕ T Qualified ϕ T Qualified
QW-404 .3 ϕ Wire size
Filler Metals .12 ϕ Classification
.14 ± Filler metal ± Filler metal
.23 ϕ Filler metal product form ϕ Filler metal product form
.37 ϕ A-Number
QW-405 .4 + Position + Position
Positions
QW-406 .4 Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat > Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat >
Preheat Interpass Interpass
QW-407 .6 ϕ PWHT
PWHT .9 ϕ PWHT
QW-408 .2 ϕ Single, mixture, or % ϕ Single, mixture, or %
Gas .3 ϕ Flow rate
QW-409 .4 ϕ Current or polarity ϕ Current or polarity
Electrical .8 ϕ I&E range
Characteristics
.12 ϕ Tungsten electrode
.26 1st layer — Heat input > 10% 1st layer — Heat input > 10%
QW-410 .1 ϕ String or weave
Technique .3 ϕ Orifice, cup, or nozzle size
.5 ϕ Method of cleaning
.7 ϕ Oscillation
.15 ϕ Electrode spacing
.25 ϕ Manual or automatic
.26 ± Peening
.38 ϕ Multiple to single layer ϕ Multiple to single layer
.50 ϕ No. of electrodes ϕ No. of electrodes
.52 ϕ Filler metal delivery
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

49
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-257
ð23Þ Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Plasma-Arc Welding (PAW)
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .1 ϕ Groove design X
Joints .5 + Backing X
.10 ϕ Root spacing X
.11 ± Retainers X
QW-403 .5 ϕ Group Number X
Base Metals .6 T Limits X
.8 ϕ T Qualified X
.12 ϕ P-Number or melt-in X
QW-404 .3 ϕ Size X
Filler Metals .4 ϕ F-Number X
.5 ϕ A-Number X
.12 ϕ Classification X
.14 ± Filler metal X
.22 ± Consum. insert X
.23 ϕ Filler metal product form X
.27 ϕ Alloy elements X
.30 ϕ t X
.33 ϕ Classification X
QW-405 .1 + Position X
Positions .3 ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding X
QW-406 .1 Decrease > 100°F (55°C) X
Preheat .3 Increase > 100°F (55°C) (IP) X
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT .2 ϕ PWHT (T&T range) X
QW-408 .1 ± Trail or ϕ comp. X
Gas .4 ϕ Composition X
.5 ± or ϕ backing flow X
.9 − Backing or ϕ comp. X
.10 − Trail or ϕ comp. X
.21 ϕ Flow rate X
QW-409 .1 > Heat input X
Electrical Characteristics .4 ϕ Current or polarity X
.8 ϕ I&E range X
.12 ϕ Tungsten electrode X
.30 ϕ Current or polarity X
QW-410 .1 ϕ String or weave X
Technique .3 ϕ Orifice, cup, or nozzle size X
.5 ϕ Method cleaning X
.6 ϕ Method back gouge X
.7 ϕ Oscillation X
.9 ϕ Multiple to single pass per side X
.10 ϕ Single to multiple electrodes X X
.11 ϕ Closed to out chamber X
.15 ϕ Electrode spacing X
.26 ± Peening X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
.87 ϕ Multiple to single pass/side X

50
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-257
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Plasma-Arc Welding (PAW) (Cont’d)

Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

51
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-257.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Plasma-Arc Welding (PAW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Corrosion-Resistant
Hard-Facing Overlay Overlay (CRO) Hard-Facing Spray Fuse Nonessential Variables
Paragraph (HFO) (See QW-216) (See QW-214) (HFSF) (See QW-216) for HFO, CRO, and HFSF
QW-402 .16 < Finished t < Finished t
Joints .17 > Finished t
QW-403 .20 ϕ P-Number ϕ P-Number ϕ P-Number
Base Metals .23 ϕ T Qualified ϕ T Qualified
QW-404 .12 ϕ Classification ϕ Classification
Filler Metals .14 ± Filler metal ± Filler metal
.23 ϕ Filler metal product ϕ Filler metal product
form form
.37 ϕ A-Number
.41 ϕ > 10% Powder feed rate ϕ > 10% Powder feed
rate
.42 ϕ > 5% Particle size
.43 ϕ Particle size ϕ Particle size
.44 ϕ Powder type ϕ Powder type
.46 ϕ Powder feed rate
QW-405 .4 + Position + Position + Position
Positions
QW-406 .4 Dec. > 100°F (55°C) Dec. > 100°F (55°C) Dec. > 100°F (55°C)
Preheat preheat > Interpass preheat > Interpass preheat > Interpass
.5 ϕ Preheat maintenance
QW-407 .6 ϕ PWHT ϕ PWHT
PWHT .7 ϕ PWHT after fusing
.9 ϕ PWHT
QW-408 .1 ± Trail or π comp.
Gas .16 ϕ > 5% Arc or metal feed ϕ > 5% Arc or metal feed ϕ > 5% Arc or metal feed
gas gas gas
.17 ϕ Type or mixture ϕ Type or mixture
.18 ϕ > 10% Mix. comp. ϕ > 10% Mix. comp.
.19 ϕ Plasma or feed gas
comp.
.20 ϕ Plasma gas flow-rate
range
QW-409 .4 ϕ Current or polarity ϕ Current or polarity
Electrical .8 ϕ I&E range
Characteristics
.12 ϕ Type or size of
electrode
.23 ϕ > 10% I&E
.24 ϕ > 10% Filler wire watt. ϕ > 10% Filler wire watt.
.25 ϕ > 10% I&E ϕ > 10% I&E

52
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-257.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Plasma-Arc Welding (PAW) (Cont’d)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Corrosion-Resistant
Hard-Facing Overlay Overlay (CRO) Hard-Facing Spray Fuse Nonessential Variables
Paragraph (HFO) (See QW-216) (See QW-214) (HFSF) (See QW-216) for HFO, CRO, and HFSF
QW-410 .1 ϕ String or weave (HFO
Technique and CRO only)
.3 ϕ Orifice, cup, or nozzle
size
.5 ϕ Method of cleaning
.7 ϕ Oscillation
.25 ϕ Manual or automatic
.26 ± Peening
.38 ϕ Multiple to single layer ϕ Multiple to single layer ϕ Multiple to single layer
.41 ϕ > 15% Travel speed ϕ > 15% Travel speed
.43 ϕ > 10% Travel speed
range
.44 ϕ > 15% Torch to
workplace
.45 ϕ Surface preparation
.46 ϕ Spray torch
.47 ϕ > 10% Fusing temp. or
method
.48 ϕ Transfer mode ϕ Transfer mode ϕ Transfer mode
.49 ϕ Torch orifice diameter ϕ Torch orifice diameter
.52 ϕ Filler metal del. ϕ Filler metal del.
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

53
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-258
ð23Þ Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Electroslag Welding (ESW)
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .1 ϕ Groove design X
Joints .10 ϕ Root spacing X
.11 ± Retainers X
QW-403 .1 ϕ P-Number X
Base Metals .4 ϕ Group Number X
.9 t Pass > 1∕2 in. (13 mm) X
QW-404 .4 ϕ F-Number X
Filler Metals .5 ϕ A-Number X
.6 ϕ Diameter X
.12 ϕ Classification X
.17 ϕ Flux type or comp. X
.18 ϕ Wire to plate X
.19 ϕ Consum. guide X
.33 ϕ Classification X
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT .2 ϕ PWHT (T&T range) X
QW-409 .5 ϕ ± 15% I&E range X
Electrical Characteristics
QW-410 .5 ϕ Method cleaning X
Technique .10 ϕ Single to multiple electrodes X
.15 ϕ Electrode spacing X
.26 ± Peening X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
.86 ϕ Oscillation X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

54
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-258.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Electroslag Welding (ESW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Hard-Facing Overlay (HFO) Corrosion-Resistant Overlay Nonessential Variables for HFO
Paragraph (See QW-216) (CRO) (See QW-214) and CRO
QW-402 .16 < Finished t < Finished t
Joints
QW-403 .20 ϕ P-Number ϕ P-Number
Base Metals .23 ϕ T Qualified ϕ T Qualified
QW-404 .6 ϕ Nominal size of electrode
Filler Metals .12 ϕ Classification
.24 ± or ϕ > 10% in supplemental ± or ϕ > 10% in supplemental
filler metal filler metal
.37 ϕ A-Number
.39 ϕ Nominal flux comp. ϕ Nominal flux comp.
.57 > Strip thickness or width > Strip thickness or width
QW-406 .4 Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat > Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat >
Preheat Interpass Interpass
QW-407 .6 ϕ PWHT
PWHT .9 ϕ PWHT
QW-409 .4 ϕ Current or polarity ϕ Current or polarity
Electrical .8 ϕ I&E range
Characteristics
.26 1st layer — Heat input > 10% 1st layer — Heat input > 10%
QW-410 .5 ϕ Method of cleaning
Technique .7 ϕ Oscillation (CRO only)
.38 ϕ Multiple to single layer ϕ Multiple to single layer
.40 − Supplemental device − Supplemental device
.50 ϕ No. of electrodes ϕ No. of electrodes
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

55
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-259
ð23Þ Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Electrogas Welding (EGW)
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .1 ϕ Groove design X
Joints .10 ϕ Root spacing X
.11 ± Retainers X
QW-403 .1 ϕ P-Number X
Base Metals .5 ϕ Group Number X
.6 T Limits X
.8 ϕ T Qualified X
.9 t Pass > 1∕2 in. (13 mm) X
QW-404 .4 ϕ F-Number X
Filler Metals .5 ϕ A-Number X
.6 ϕ Diameter X
.12 ϕ Classification X
.23 ϕ Filler metal product form X
.33 ϕ Classification X
QW-406 .1 Decrease > 100°F (55°C) X
Preheat
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT .2 ϕ PWHT (T&T range) X
QW-408 .2 ϕ Single, mixture, or % X
Gas .3 ϕ Flow rate X
QW-409 .1 > Heat input X
Electrical Characteristics .4 ϕ Current or polarity X
.8 ϕ I&E range X
.30 ϕ Current or polarity X
QW-410 .5 ϕ Method cleaning X
Technique .7 ϕ Oscillation X
.8 ϕ Tube-work distance X
.9 ϕ Multiple to single pass per side X
.10 ϕ Single to multiple electrodes X
.15 ϕ Electrode spacing X
.26 ± Peening X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
.87 ϕ Multiple to single pass/side X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

GENEAL NOTE: Automated vertical gas metal-arc welding for vertical position only.

56
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-260
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Electron Beam Welding (EBW) ð23Þ

Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .1 ϕ Groove design X
Joints .2 − Backing X
.6 > Fit-up gap X
QW-403 .1 ϕ P-Number X
Base Metals .3 ϕ Penetration X
.15 ϕ P-Number X
QW-404 .1 ϕ Cross section or speed X
Filler Metals .2 < t or ϕ comp. X
.8 ± or ϕ Chem. comp. X
.14 ± Filler X
.20 ϕ Method of addition X
.21 ϕ Analysis X
.33 ϕ Classification X
QW-406 .1 Decrease > 100°F (55°C) X
Preheat
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT
QW-408 .6 ϕ Environment X
Gas
QW-409 .6 ϕ I, E, speed, distance, osc. X
Electrical Characteristics .7 ϕ Pulsing frequency X
QW-410 .5 ϕ Method cleaning X
Technique .14 ϕ Angle of beam axis X
.17 ϕ Type equip. X
.18 > Pressure of vacuum X
.19 ϕ Filament type, size, etc. X
.20 + Wash pass X
.21 1 vs. 2 side welding X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
.86 ϕ Oscillation X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

57
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-261
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Stud Welding
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .8 ϕ Stud shape size X
Joints .9 − Flux or ferrule X
QW-403 .17 ϕ Base metal or stud metal X
Base Metal P-No.
QW-405 .1 + Position X
Positions
QW-406 .1 Decrease > 100°F (55°C) X
Preheat
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT
QW-408 .2 ϕ Single, mixture, or % X
Gas
QW-409 .4 ϕ Current or polarity X
Electrical Characteristics .9 ϕ Arc timing X
.10 ϕ Amperage X
.11 ϕ Power source X
QW-410 .22 ϕ Gun model or lift X
Technique .64 Use of thermal processes X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

58
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-262
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Inertia and Continuous Drive Friction Welding
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .12 ϕ ± 10 deg X
Joints ϕ Cross section > 10% X
ϕ O.D. > ±10% X
ϕ Solid-to-tube X
QW-403 .19 ϕ Base metal X
Base Metals
QW-406 .1 ϕ Decrease > 100°F (55°C) X
Preheat
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT
QW-408 .6 ϕ Environment X
Gas
QW-410 .27 ϕ Spp. > ±10% X
Technique .28 ϕ Load > ±10% X
.29 ϕ Energy > ±10% X
.30 ϕ Upset > ±10% X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

59
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-263
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Resistance Welding
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .13 ϕ Spot, projection, seam X
Joints .14 ϕ Overlap, spacing X
.15 ϕ Projection, shape, size X
QW-403 .1 ϕ P-No. X
Base Metals .21 ± Coating, plating X
.22 ± T X
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT
QW-408 .23 − Gases X
Gas
QW-409 .13 ϕ RWMA class X
Electrical .14 ± ϕ Slope X
.15 ϕ Pressure, current, time X
.17 ϕ Power supply X
.18 Tip cleaning X
QW-410 .31 ϕ Cleaning method X
Technique .32 ϕ Pressure, time X
.33 ϕ Equipment X
.34 ϕ Cooling medium X
.35 ϕ Throat X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

60
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-264
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Laser Beam Welding (LBW) ð23Þ

Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
.2 ± Backing X
.6 > Fit-up gap X
.18 ϕ Lap joint config. X

QW-402 .25 ϕ Lap to groove X

Joints .26 < Bevel angle > 5 deg X
QW-403 .3 ϕ Penetration X
Base Metals .35 ϕ Base metal X
QW-404 .1 ϕ Cross section or speed X
Filler Metals .2 < t or ϕ comp. X
.4 ϕ F-No. X
.5 ϕ A-No. X
.8 ± or ϕ chem. comp. X
.14 ± Filler metal X
.20 ϕ Method of addition X
QW-406 .1 Decrease > 100°F (55°C) X
Preheat
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT
QW-408 .2 ϕ Single, mixture, or % X
Gas .6 ϕ Environment X
.11 ± Gases X
.12 Decrease > 10% flow rate X
QW-409 .19 ϕ Pulse X
Electrical Characteristics .20 ϕ Mode, energy X
.21 Decrease in power X
QW-410 .5 ϕ Method cleaning X
Technique .14 ϕ Angle of beam axis X
.20 + Wash pass X
.21 1 vs. 2 side welding X
.37 ϕ Single to multiple pass X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
.66 ϕ Travel, Beam factors X
.67 ϕ Optical technique X
.68 ϕ Type of equipment X
.77 ϕ Wavelength X
.80 ϕ Spot size X
.86 ϕ Oscillation X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

61
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-264.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Laser Beam Welding (LBW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Hard-Facing Overlay (HFO) Corrosion-Resistant Overlay Nonessential Variables for HFO
Paragraph (See QW-216) (CRO) (See QW-214) and CRO
QW-402 .16 < Finished t < Finished t
Joints
QW-403 .20 ϕ P-Number ϕ P-Number
Base Metals
QW-404 .12 ϕ Classification ϕ Classification
Filler Metals .27 ϕ Alloy elements ϕ Alloy elements
.44 ϕ Particle type ϕ Particle type
.47 ϕ Filler or powder metal size ϕ Filler or powder metal size
.48 ϕ Powder metal density ϕ Powder metal density
.49 ϕ Filler metal powder feed rate ϕ Filler metal powder feed rate
QW-405 .1 + Position + Position
Positions
QW-406 .4 Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat > Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat >
Preheat Interpass Interpass
QW-407 .6 ϕ PWHT
PWHT .9 ϕ PWHT
QW-408 .2 ϕ Single, mixture, or % ϕ Single, mixture, or %
Gas .6 ϕ Environment ϕ Environment
.11 ± Gases ± Gases
.12 Decrease > 10% flow rate Decrease > 10% flow rate
QW-409 .19 ϕ Pulse ϕ Pulse
Electrical .20 ϕ Mode, energy ϕ Mode, energy
Characteristics
.21 Decrease in power Decrease in power
QW-410 .5 ϕ Method of cleaning
Technique .17 ϕ Type or model of equipment ϕ Type or model of equipment
.38 ϕ Multiple to single layer ϕ Multiple to single layer
.45 ϕ Method of surface prep. ϕ Method of surface prep.
.52 ϕ Filler metal delivery ϕ Filler metal delivery
.53 ϕ Overlap, spacing ϕ Overlap, spacing
.77 ϕ Wavelength ϕ Wavelength
.80 ϕ Spot size ϕ Spot size
.86 ϕ Oscillation ϕ Oscillation
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

62
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-264.2
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Low-Power Density Laser Beam Welding (LLBW)
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .1 ϕ Groove design X
Joints .5 + Backing X
.10 ϕ Root spacing X
.11 ± Retainers X
QW-403 .5 ϕ Group number X
Base Metals .6 T Limits X
.8 T Qualified X
.11 ϕ P-No. qualified X
QW-404 .3 ϕ Size X
Filler Metals .4 ϕ F-Number X
.5 ϕ A-Number X
.12 ϕ Classification X
.14 ± Filler X
.22 ± Consum. insert X
.23 ϕ Filler metal product form X
.30 ϕ t X
.33 ϕ Classification X
.50 ± Flux X
QW-405 .1 + Position X
Positions .3 ϕ ↑ ↓ Vertical welding X
QW-406 .1 Decrease > 100°F (55°C) X
Preheat .3 Increase > 100°F (55 °C) (IP) X
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT .2 ϕ PWHT (T&T range) X
QW-408 .1 ± Trail or ϕ comp. X
Gas .2 ϕ Single, mixture, or % X
.3 ϕ Flow rate X
.5 ± or ϕ Backing flow X
.9 – Backing or ϕ comp. X
.10 ϕ Shielding or trailing X
QW-409 .1 > Heat input X
Electrical Characteristics .19 ϕ Pulse X
.20 ϕ Mode, energy X
.21 Decrease in power X

63
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-264.2
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Low-Power Density Laser Beam Welding (LLBW) (Cont’d)
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-410 .3 ϕ Orifice, cup, or nozzle size X
Technique .5 ϕ Method cleaning X
.6 ϕ Method back gouge X
.7 ϕ Oscillation X
.9 ϕ Multi to single pass per side X X
.11 ϕ Closed to out chamber X
.26 ± Peening X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
.66 ϕ Travel, Beam factors X
.67 ϕ Optical technique X
.68 ϕ Type of equipment X
.77 ϕ Wavelength X
.80 ϕ Spot size X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

64
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-265
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Flash Welding
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .19 ϕ Diameter or thickness X
Joints .20 ϕ Joint configuration X
.21 ϕ Method or equip. used to X
minimize ID flash
.22 ϕ End preparation method X
QW-403 .24 ϕ Spec., type, or grade X
Base Metals
QW-406 .7 ϕ > 10% Amperage or number of X
Preheat preheat cycles, or method, or >
25°F (15°C) temperature
QW-407 .8 ϕ PWHT, PWHT cycles, or separate X
PWHT PWHT time or temperature
QW-408 .22 ϕ Shielding gas composition, X
Gas pressure, or purge time
QW-409 .27 ϕ > 10% Flashing time X
Electrical Characteristics .28 ϕ > 10% Upset current time X
QW-410 .17 ϕ Type or model of equipment X
Technique .54 ϕ > 10% Upset length or force X
.55 ϕ > 10% Distance between X
clamping dies or preparation
of clamping area
.56 ϕ Clamping force X
.57 ϕ 10% Forward or reverse speed X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

65
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-266
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Diffusion Welding (DFW)
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-403 .28 Base metal grade X
Base Metals .29 ϕ Surface finish X
QW-404 .53 ± Filler metal and composition X
Filler Metal
QW-407 .10 ± PWHT temperature, time, cooling X
PWHT rate
QW-408 .25 ϕ Furnace Atmosphere X
Gas
QW-410 .70 ϕ Preassembly Cleaning X
Technique .71 < Block Compression X
.72 < Welding time or temperature X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

66
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-267
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications — Friction Stir Welding (FSW)
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
QW-402 .27 ϕ Fixed backing X
Joints .28 ϕ Joint design X
.29 ϕ Joint spacing > 10% X
QW-403 .19 ϕ Type or grade X
Base Metals .30 ϕ T qualified > 20% X
QW-404 Filler Metals .14 ± Filler metal X
.55 > Thickness or width of preplaced X
filler metal
.56 ϕ Type/grade X
QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT X
PWHT
QW-408 .26 ϕ Shielding gas X
Gas
QW-410 .21 1-side vs. 2-side welding X
Technique .73 ϕ Joint restraint X
.74 ϕ Control method X
.75 ϕ Tool design X
.76 ϕ Tool operation X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ↑ Uphill ← Forehand ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than ↓ Downhill → Backhand

67
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-283 WELDS WITH BUTTERING QW-284 RESISTANCE WELDING MACHINE

QW-283.1 Scope. This paragraph only applies when QUALIFICATION
the essential variables for the buttering process are Each resistance welding machine shall be tested to
different than the essential variables for the process determine its ability to make welds consistently and
used for subsequent completion of the joint. Common reproducibly. A machine shall be requalified whenever
examples are it is rebuilt, moved to a new location requiring a
(a) the buttered member is heat treated and the change in power supply, when the power supply is
completed weld is not heat treated after welding changed, or any other significant change is made to
(b) the filler metal used for buttering has a different F- the equipment. Spot and projection welding machine
Number from that used for the subsequent completion of qualification testing shall consist of making a set of
the weld 100 consecutive welds. Every fifth of these welds shall
QW-283.2 Tests Required. The procedure shall be be subjected to mechanical shear tests. Five welds,
qualified by buttering the test coupon (including heat which shall include one of the first five and one of the
treating of the buttered member when this will be last five of the set shall be metallographically examined.
done in production welding) and then making the subse- Seam welding machine qualification testing shall be the
quent weld joining the members. The variables for the same as procedure qualification testing required per
buttering and for the subsequent weld shall be in accor- QW-286. Maintenance or adjustment of the welding
dance with QW-250, except that QW-409.1 shall be an machine shall not be permitted during welding of a set
essential variable for the welding process(es) used to of test welds. Qualification testing on any P-No. 21
complete the weld when the minimum buttering thickness through P-No. 26 aluminum alloy shall qualify the
is less than 3∕16 in. (5 mm). Mechanical testing of the machine for all materials. Qualification on P-No. 1
completed weldment shall be in accordance with through P-No. 15F iron-base alloys and any P-No. 41
QW-202.2(a). through P-No. 49 nickel-base alloys shall qualify the
If the buttering is done with filler metal of the same machine for all P-No. 1 through P-No. 15F and P-No.
composition as the filler metal used to complete the 41 through P-No. 49 metals. Qualification testing of the
weld, one weld test coupon may be used to qualify the machine using base metals assigned to P-No. 51
dissimilar metal joint by welding the first member directly through P-No. 53, P-No. 61, or P-No. 62 qualifies the
to the second member in accordance with Section IX. welding machine to weld all base metals assigned to P-
No. 51 through P-No. 53, P-No. 61, and P-No. 62.
QW-283.3 Buttering Thickness. The thickness of Testing and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance
buttering which shall remain on the production buttered with QW-196.
member after all machining and grinding is completed and
before subsequent completion of the joint shall be QW-285 RESISTANCE SPOT AND PROJECTION
required by the WPS. When this thickness is less than WELD PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION
3
∕16 in. (5 mm), the thickness of buttering on the test
Procedure qualification testing for spot or projection
coupon shall be measured before the buttered member
welds shall be done following a Welding Procedure Spec-
is welded to the second member. This thickness shall
ification, and it shall consist of making a set of ten con-
become the minimum qualified thickness of buttering.
secutive welds. Five of these welds shall be subjected to
QW-283.4 Qualification Alternative. When an essen- mechanical shear tests and five to metallographic exam-
tial variable is changed in the portion of the weld to be ination. Examination, testing, and acceptance criteria shall
made after buttering or when a different organization is be in accordance with QW-196.
performing the portion of the weld to be made after
buttering, a new qualification shall be performed in accor- QW-286 RESISTANCE SEAM WELD PROCEDURE
dance with one of the following methods: QUALIFICATION
(a) Qualify in accordance with QW-283.2 and
QW-286.1 Test coupons described below shall consist
QW-283.3. When the original qualification buttering thick-
of the same number of members, orientation, material
ness is less than 3∕16 in. (5 mm), the buttering thickness
grades or types, and thicknesses to be used in production
shall not be greater, nor the heat input higher than was
welding.
used on the original qualification.
(b) When the original qualification buttering thickness QW-286.2 A test coupon as shown in Figure
is 3∕16 in. (5 mm) or greater, qualify the portion of the weld QW-462.7.1 shall be prepared by drilling a hole in the
to be made after buttering using any P-Number material center of one of the outer coupon members. In the
that nominally matches the chemical analysis of the case of a test coupon containing more than two
buttering weld metal for the buttered base metal of members, a hole shall be drilled in each member
the test coupon. except for one of the outer members. A pipe nipple

68
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

shall be welded or brazed to the outer member at the hole. Table QW-288.1
The test coupon shall then be welded around the edges, Essential Variables for Procedure Qualification of Tube-
sealing the space between the members as shown in to-Tubesheet Welding (All Welding Processes Except
Figure QW-462.7.1. The coupon shall be pressurized Explosion Welding)
hydrostatically until failure occurs. The procedure quali- Paragraph Brief of Variables
fication is acceptable if failure occurs in the base metal.
QW-402 .31 < Ligament size
QW-286.3 A test coupon at least 10 in. (250 mm) long Joints .32 ϕ Joint configuration
shall be made per Figure QW-462.7.2. This test coupon QW-403 .18 ϕ P-Number or A-Number
shall be cut transverse to the length of the weld into Base Metals .32 ϕ Tube thickness
ten pieces, each approximately 1 in. (25 mm) long.
.33 ϕ P-Number
Four transverse weld specimens and four longitudinal
QW-404 .3 ϕ Filler metal size
weld cross section specimens shall be cut and prepared
Filler Metals .58 ± Preplaced filler metal
as detailed in Figure QW-462.7.2. The specimens shall be
metallographically examined for compliance with the re- .59 ϕ A-number
quirements of QW-196. QW-405 .3 ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding
Positions .4 ϕ Position
QW-287 VARIATION OF SETTINGS FOR ELECTRIC QW-406 .1 Joint spacing > 10%
RESISTANCE WELDING Preheat .3 Increase>100°F (55°C) (IP)
Settings for preheating cycles, electrode pressure, QW-407 .1 ϕ PWHT
welding current, welding time cycle, or postheating PWHT
cycles may be varied by ±5% from the values recorded QW-409 .4 ϕ Polarity
on the PQR, or by ±10% when only one of the above Electrical .10 ϕ Amperage
Characteristics
settings is changed.
QW-410 .5 ϕ Method of cleaning
QW-288 TUBE-TO-TUBESHEET QUALIFICATION Technique .37 ϕ Single to multiple pass
ESSENTIAL VARIABLES .81 + Tube expansion

Essential variables applicable to tube-to-tubesheet Legend:

welding procedure qualifications in accordance with + Addition < Decrease or less than
QW-193 are listed in Table QW-288.1 for all welding − Deletion ϕ Change
processes except explosion welding and Table
QW-288.2 for explosion welding. Essential procedure
qualification variables applicable for each welding GENERAL NOTE: QW-403.32, QW-404.59, QW-405.3, QW-406.1,
process listed in QW-250 shall also be observed in addi- QW-406.3, QW-409.4, QW-409.10, QW-410.25, and QW-410.37 do
tion to the variables of QW-288. A change in the welding not apply to explosion welding.
process used shall require requalification.

Table QW-288.2
Essential Variables for Procedure Qualification of Tube-
to-Tubesheet Welding (Explosion Welding)
Paragraph Brief of Variables
QW-403 .34 ϕ Tube thickness
Base Metals
QW-410 .82 ϕ Pressure application
Technique .83 ϕ Explosive
.84 ϕ Distance charge to tubesheet
.85 ϕ Specified clearance
Legend:
ϕ Change

69
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-289 LOW-ENERGY CAPACITOR DISCHARGE is necessary only to prepare an additional test coupon
WELDING using the same WPS with the same variables and new
temper bead welding essential variable(s) with the
The following requirements apply to low-energy capa- coupon long enough to obtain the required test specimens.
citor discharge welding:
(a) The energy output shall be limited to 125 W-sec. QW-290.2 Welding Process Restrictions. Temper
(b) A Welding Procedure Specification describing the bead welding is limited to SMAW, GTAW, SAW, GMAW
capacitor discharge equipment, the combination of mate- (including FCAW), LLBW, and PAW. Manual and semiau-
rials to be joined, and the technique of application shall be tomatic GTAW and PAW are prohibited, except for the root
prepared; qualification of the welding procedure is not pass of groove welds made from one side and as described
required. for making repairs to temper bead welds in QW-290.6. The
variables listed in Table QW-290.4 apply in addition to the
variables applicable for the process(es) qualified as given
QW-290 TEMPER BEAD WELDING
in QW-250. When toughness testing is required by the
When the referencing code, standard, or specification referencing code, standard, or specification for accep-
specifies the use of this paragraph for temper bead tance, the supplementary essential variables of
welding, QW-290.1 through QW-290.6 shall apply. QW-250 applicable to the process being qualified shall
apply. When the variables listed in Table QW-290.4
QW-290.1 Basic Qualification and Upgrading of
conflict with or provide more stringent limitations
Existing Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs). All
than those of QW-250, the variables listed in Table
WPSs for temper bead welding of groove and fillet
QW-290.4 shall govern.
weld shall be qualified for groove welding in accordance
with the rules in QW-202 for qualification by groove QW-290.3 Variables for Temper Bead Welding Quali-
welding or the rules in QW-283 for welds with buttering. fications. Table QW-290.4 lists the additional essential
WPSs for overlay shall be qualified in accordance with and nonessential variables that apply when temper
QW-214 or QW-216. Once these requirements and any bead qualification is required. The essential variables
additional qualification requirements of the referencing listed in column A shall apply when the referencing
code, standard, or specification have been satisfied, code, standard, or specification specifies hardness criteria
then it is necessary only to prepare an additional test for temper bead qualification acceptance. The essential
coupon using the same procedure with the same essential variables listed in column B shall apply when the refer-
variables and, when required, the same supplementary encing code, standard, or specification specifies toughness
essential variables with the coupon long enough to testing criteria for temper bead qualification acceptance.
obtain the required temper bead test specimens. Qualifi- The essential variables listed in column C shall apply when
cation for groove welding, welding with buttering or clad- the referencing code, standard, or specification specifies
ding, and temper bead welding may also be done in a single neither hardness nor toughness test criteria. The variables
test coupon. listed in the “Nonessential Variables” column apply in all
When a WPS has been previously qualified to satisfy all cases.
requirements including temper bead welding, but one or
more temper bead welding variables are changed, then it

70
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-290.4
Welding Variables for Temper Bead Procedure Qualification
Essential Variables [Note (1)] Nonessential
Paragraph Brief of Variables A B C Variables
QW-402 .23 + Fluid backing X
.24 + Fluid backing X X
QW-403 .25 ϕ P-No. or Gr. No. X X
.26 > Carbon equivalent X
.27 > T X X
QW-404 .51 Storage X
.52 Diffusible hydrogen X X X
.9 < Preheat temperature X
.10 Preheat soak time X
QW-406 .11 Postweld bakeout X
QW-408 .24 Gas moisture X
QW-409 .29 ϕ Heat input ratio X X X
QW-410 .10 ϕ Single to multiple X X X
electrode
.58 − Surface temper beads X X X
.59 ϕ Type of welding X X X
.60 + Thermal preparation X X X
.61 Surface bead placement X X X
.62 Surface bead removal X
method
.63 Bead overlap X X X
.65 ± Grinding X X X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase or greater than ϕ Change
− Deletion < Decrease or less than

NOTE: (1) Construction code or design specification requirements for Essential Variable columns:
A = where maximum hardness is specified
B = where toughness testing is specified
C = where maximum hardness or toughness testing is not specified

71
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-290.5 Test Coupon Preparation and Testing. (-c) one measurement located immediately below
the toe of the weld bead and at least one measurement on
(a) The test coupon may be any geometry that is
each side of that impression
suitable for removal of the required specimens. It shall
(3) When the coupon is a full-penetration groove
consist of a groove weld, a cavity in a plate, overlay, or
weld made from one side, additional measurements
other suitable geometry. The distance from each edge
shall be taken along a line approximately 0.04 in.
of the weld preparation to the edge of the test coupon
(1 mm) above the root side surface. Along this line,
shall be at least 3 in. measured transverse to the direction
there shall be a minimum of two measurements in the
of welding. The depth of preparation shall be such that at
weld metal, two in the heat-affected zone, and two in
least two layers of weld metal are deposited, one of which
the unaffected base metal.
may be the surface temper bead layer and deep enough to
Full-penetration groove weld test coupons qualify full
remove the required test specimens.
and partial penetration groove welds, fillet welds, and
(b) Only bend tests in accordance with QW-451 are
weld build-up. Partial penetration groove weld test
required for the additional temper bead qualification
coupons only qualify partial penetration groove welds,
when either hardness or toughness testing is also
fillet welds, and build-up. Overlay test coupons only
required. No qualified limitations or process essential
qualify overlay welds.
or supplementary essential variables, if applicable, per
Hardness readings shall not exceed the hardness limits
QW-250 may be affected. Where neither maximum hard-
specified by the Construction Code or Design Specifica-
ness nor toughness testing is specified by the referencing
tion.
code, standard, or specification, all of the test require-
(d) When toughness testing is specified by the appli-
ments of QW-451 apply.
cable Construction Code or Design Specification, the
(c) When hardness testing is specified by a Construc-
test coupon shall be tested for toughness. The extent
tion Code or Design Specification, measurements shall be
of testing (i.e., weld metal, HAZ, unaffected base
taken across the weld metal, heat-affected zone, and base
metal), the testing temperature, and the acceptance
metal using the Vickers method with a 10-kg load. Incre-
criteria shall be as provided in the applicable Construction
ments between measurements shall be as specified in
Code or Design Specification.
ASTM E384. As an alternative to the Vickers method,
Instrumented Indentation Testing in accordance with QW-290.6 In-Process Repair Welding.
ASTM E2546 may be used with test forces in the
macro range of 2.2 lbf to 265 lbf (1 kgf to 120 kgf) (a) In-process repairs to welds made using temper
and increments between measurements as determined bead welding are permitted. In-process repairs are
in accordance with ASTM E2546. defined as repairs in which a flaw is mechanically
(1) Measurements shall be taken along a line at removed and a repair weld is made before welding of
approximately mid-plane of the thickness of the test a joint is presented for final visual inspection. Examples
coupon weld metal. Along this line, there shall be of such repairs are areas of removal of porosity, incom-
(-a) a minimum of two measurements in the weld plete fusion, etc., where sufficient metal has been mechani-
metal fill layers. cally removed that localized addition of weld metal is
(-b) at least one measurement on each: the weld necessary in order to make the surface geometry suitable
beads against base metal, first-layer tempering beads, and for continuation of normal welding.
the second-layer tempering beads. (b) Surfaces to be repaired shall be prepared by
(-c) a minimum of three measurements in the mechanical removal of flaws and preparation of the
heat-affected zone. These measurements may be taken surface to a suitable geometry.
in a line approximately parallel to the HAZ when (c) For processes other than manual and semiauto-
spacing between impressions does not allow for three matic GTAW and PAW, repairs shall be made using the
measurements to be taken in a single line transverse parameters given in the WPS for production temper
to the HAZ. bead welding. The approximate location of beads to be
(-d) a minimum of two measurements in the unaf- deposited relative to the original base metal surface
fected base metal. shall be identified, and the applicable parameters shall
(2) Additional measurements shall be taken along a be used for the layers to be deposited as specified by
line approximately 0.04 in. (1 mm) below the original base the WPS.
metal surface. Along this line, there shall be (d) When it is necessary to make repairs using manual
(-a) a minimum of two measurements in the weld or semiautomatic GTAW or PAW, a WPS shall be prepared
metal fill layers based on PQRs developed for temper bead welding using
(-b) at least one measurement on each: the weld machine or automatic GTAW or PAW, respectively. This
beads against base metal, first-layer tempering beads, and WPS shall describe the size of the beads to be deposited
the second-layer tempering beads and the volts, amps, and travel speed to be used for the
beads against the base metal, for each temper bead layer

72
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

and for the fill and surface temper bead layers corre- heat input used by the welder shall be measured for
sponding to the locations where repair welding is to each pass, and the size of each weld bead shall be
be done. These shall be within the equivalent power measured for each pass, and they shall be as required
ratio for machine or automatic welding for the respective by the WPS. The following essential variables shall
layers given in QW-409.29. apply for this demonstration:
(e) Welders who will use manual and semiautomatic (1) a change from one welding procedure to another
GTAW or PAW shall be qualified to use these welding (2) a change from manual to semiautomatic welding
processes as required by QW-300. In addition, each and vice versa
welder shall complete a proficiency demonstration. For (3) a change in position based on a groove weld in
this demonstration, each welder shall deposit two or either plate or pipe as shown in Table QW-461.9
more weld beads using WPS parameters for each (4) continuity of qualification in accordance with
deposit layer. The test coupon size shall be sufficiently QW-322 shall be based on following the WPS that was
large to make the required weld bead passes. The demonstrated in addition to using the process as required
minimum pass length shall be 4 in. (100 mm). The by QW-322

73
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

ARTICLE III
WELDING PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATIONS

QW-300 GENERAL The welder or welding operator who prepares the

groove weld WPS qualification test coupons meeting
ð23Þ QW-300.1 This Article lists the welding processes the requirements of QW-200 is also qualified within
separately, with the essential variables that apply to the limits of the performance qualifications, listed in
welder and welding operator performance qualifications. QW-304 for welders and in QW-305 for welding operators.
The welder qualification is limited by the essential vari- The welder or welding operator is qualified only within
ables given for each welding process. These variables are the limits for positions specified in QW-303.
listed in QW-350, and are defined in Article IV Welding The welder or welding operator who prepares the fillet
Data. The welding operator qualification is limited by weld WPS qualification test coupons meeting the require-
the essential variables given in QW-360 for each type ments of QW-200 is qualified to weld non-pressure-
of weld. retaining fillet welds only within the limits of the perfor-
Welders and welding operators may follow any WPS mance qualifications listed in QW-304 for welders and in
specifying the process for which they are qualified QW-305 for welding operators. The welder or welding
within the limits of the essential variables. operator is qualified only within the limits for positions
A welder or welding operator may be qualified by volu- specified in QW-303.
metric NDE of a test coupon or their initial production
welding within the limitations of QW-304 and QW-305 QW-301.3 Identification of Welders and Welding
or by bend tests taken from a test coupon. Operators. Each qualified welder and welding operator
For the purpose of establishing performance qualifica- shall be assigned an identifying number, letter, or
tion continuity, the welder’s or welding operator’s quali- symbol by the organization, which shall be used to identify
fication continuity begins from the date welding of the test the work of that welder or welding operator.
piece(s) was completed, provided the required testing QW-301.4 Record of Tests. The record of Welder
was performed and the test results obtained were accept- Performance Qualification (WPQ) tests shall include
able. the essential variables (see QW-350), the type of test
and test results, and the ranges qualified in accordance
QW-301 TESTS with QW-452 for each welder. The record of Welding
QW-301.1 Intent of Tests. The performance qualifica- Operator Performance Qualification (WOPQ) tests shall
tion tests are intended to determine the ability of welders include the essential variables (see QW-360) and the
and welding operators to make sound welds. type of test and test results for each welding operator.
Suggested forms for these records are given in Forms
QW-301.2 Qualification Tests. Each organization shall
QW-484A and QW-484B (see Nonmandatory Appendix B).
qualify each welder or welding operator for each welding
process to be used in production welding. The perfor- QW-302 TYPE OF TEST REQUIRED
mance qualification test shall be welded in accordance
with qualified Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS), QW-302.1 Mechanical Tests. Except as may be speci-
or Standard Welding Procedure Specifications (SWPS) fied for special processes (see QW-380), the type and
listed in Mandatory Appendix E, except that when perfor- number of test specimens required for mechanical
mance qualification is done in accordance with a WPS or testing shall be in accordance with QW-452. Groove
SWPS that requires a preheat or postweld heat treatment, weld test specimens shall be removed in a manner
these may be omitted. Changes beyond which requalifi- similar to that shown in Figures QW-463.2(a) through
cation is required are given in QW-350 for welders QW-463.2(g). Fillet weld test specimens shall be
and in QW-360 for welding operators. Allowable removed in a manner similar to that shown in Figures
visual, mechanical, and radiographic examination require- QW-462.4(a) through QW-462.4(d) and Figure
ments are described in QW-304 and QW-305. Retests and QW-463.2(h).
renewal of qualification are given in QW-320. All mechanical tests shall meet the requirements
prescribed in QW-160 or QW-180, as applicable.

74
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-302.2 Volumetric NDE. When the welder or the tests for fillet welds shall be qualified to make tack
welding operator is qualified by volumetric NDE, as welds in joints to be fillet welded as limited in Table
permitted in QW-304 for welders and QW-305 for QW-461.9 and fillet welds only in the thicknesses of mate-
welding operators, the minimum length of coupon(s) rial, sizes of fillet welds, and diameters of pipe and tube 27∕8
to be examined shall be 6 in. (150 mm) and shall in. (73 mm) O.D. and over, as shown in Table QW-452.5,
include the entire weld circumference for pipe(s), within the applicable essential variables. Welders and
except that for small diameter pipe, multiple coupons welding operators who make fillet welds on pipe or
of the same diameter pipe may be required, but the tube less than 27∕8 in. (73 mm) O.D. must pass the pipe
number need not exceed four consecutively made test fillet weld test per Table QW-452.4 or the required
coupons. The examination technique and acceptance mechanical tests in QW-304 and QW-305 as applicable.
criteria shall be in accordance with QW-191.
QW-303.3 Special Positions. An organization who
QW-302.3 Test Coupons in Pipe. For test coupons does production welding in a special orientation may
made on pipe in position 1G or 2G of Figure make the tests for performance qualification in this spe-
QW-461.4, two specimens shall be removed as shown cific orientation. Such qualifications are valid only for the
for bend specimens in Figure QW-463.2(d) or Figure flat position and for the special positions actually tested,
QW-463.2(e), omitting the specimens in the upper- except that an angular deviation of ±15 deg is permitted in
right and lower-left quadrants, and replacing the root- the inclination of the weld axis and the rotation of the weld
bend specimen in the upper-left quadrant of Figure face, as defined in Figures QW-461.1 and QW-461.2.
QW-463.2(d) with a face-bend specimen. For test
QW-303.4 Stud-Weld Positions. Qualification in the 4S
coupons made on pipe in position 5G or 6G of Figure
position also qualifies for the 1S position. Qualification in
QW-461.4, specimens shall be removed in accordance
the 4S and 2S positions qualifies for all positions.
with Figure QW-463.2(d) or Figure QW-463.2(e) and
all four specimens shall pass the test. For test coupons QW-304 WELDERS ð23Þ
made in both positions 2G and 5G on a single pipe test
coupon, specimens shall be removed in accordance Except for the special requirements of QW-380, each
with Figure QW-463.2(f) or Figure QW-463.2(g). welder who welds under the rules of the Code shall
have passed the mechanical and visual examinations
QW-302.4 Visual Examination. For plate coupons all prescribed in QW-302.1 and QW-302.4 respectively. Alter-
surfaces (except areas designated “discard”) shall be natively, welders may be qualified by volumetric NDE per
examined visually per QW-194 before cutting of bend QW-191 when making a groove weld using SMAW, SAW,
specimens. Pipe coupons shall be visually examined GTAW, PAW, and GMAW (except short-circuiting mode for
per QW-194 over the entire circumference, inside and radiographic examination) or a combination of these
outside. processes, except for P-No. 21 through P-No. 26, P-No.
51 through P-No. 53, and P-No. 61 through P-No. 62
QW-303 LIMITS OF QUALIFIED POSITIONS AND
metals. Welders making groove welds in P-No. 21
DIAMETERS (SEE QW-461) through P-No. 26, P-No. 51 through P-No. 53, P-No. 61,
QW-303.1 Groove Welds — General. Welders and and P-No. 62 metals with the GTAW process may also
welding operators who pass the required tests for be qualified by volumetric NDE per QW-191. The Volu-
groove welds in the test positions of Table QW-461.9 metric NDE shall be in accordance with QW-302.2.
shall be qualified for the positions of groove welds, QW-304.1 Examination. Welds made in test coupons
tack welds in joints to be groove or fillet welded, and for performance qualification may be examined by visual
fillet welds shown in Table QW-461.9. In addition, and mechanical examinations (see QW-302.1, QW-302.4)
welders and welding operators who pass the required or by volumetric NDE (see QW-302.2) for the process(es)
tests for groove welds shall also be qualified to make and mode of arc transfer specified in QW-304. Alterna-
fillet welds in all thicknesses and pipe diameters of tively, a minimum 6 in. (150 mm) length of the first
any size within the limits of the welding variables of production weld(s) made by a welder using the
QW-350 or QW-360 and tack welds in joints to be process(es) and/or mode of arc transfer specified in
groove or fillet welded as limited in Table QW-461.9, QW-304 may be examined by volumetric NDE.
as applicable. (a) For pipe(s) welded in the 5G, 6G, or special posi-
QW-303.2 Fillet Welds — General. Welders and tions, the entire production weld circumference made by
welding operators who pass the required tests for fillet the welder shall be examined.
welds in the test positions of Table QW-461.9 shall be (b) For small diameter pipe where the required
qualified for the positions of fillet welds, and tack minimum length of weld cannot be obtained from a
welds in joints to be fillet welded, shown in Table single production pipe circumference, additional consec-
QW-461.9. Welders and welding operators who pass utive circumferences of the same pipe diameter made by

75
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

the welder shall be examined, except that the total number completely and repaired by a qualified welder or
of circumferences need not exceed four. welding operator. Alternatively, retests may be made
(c) The examination technique and acceptance criteria as permitted in QW-320.
for production welds shall be in accordance with QW-191.
QW-306 COMBINATION OF WELDING PROCESSES ð23Þ
QW-304.2 Failure to Meet Examination Standards. If
a production weld is selected for welder performance Each welder or welding operator shall be qualified
qualification and it does not meet the examination stan- within the limits given in QW-301 for each welding
dards, the welder has failed the test. In this event, the process he will use in production welding. A welder or
entire production weld made by this welder shall be exam- welding operator may be qualified by making tests
ined and repaired by a qualified welder or welding with each welding process using fillet or groove-weld
operator. Alternatively, retests may be made as permitted test coupons, or with a combination of welding processes
in QW-320. in a single groove-weld test coupon. A single groove-weld
test coupon may also be used to qualify two or more
ð23Þ QW-305 WELDING OPERATORS welders or welding operators, each using the same or
a different process. For combination qualifications in a
Except for the special requirements of QW-380, each
single test coupon, the limits for thicknesses of deposited
welding operator who welds under the rules of this
weld metal and the number of bend test specimens are
Code shall have passed the mechanical and visual exam-
given in QW-452 and shall be considered individually
inations prescribed in QW-302.1 and QW-302.4, respec-
for each welder or welding operator for each welding
tively. Alternatively, welding operators may be qualified
process or whenever there is a change in an essential vari-
by volumetric NDE per QW-191 when making a groove
able. A welder or welding operator qualified in combina-
weld using SMAW, SAW, GTAW, PAW, EGW, LLBW, and
tion on a single test coupon is qualified to weld in
GMAW (except short-circuiting mode for radiographic
production using any of his qualified processes individu-
examination) or a combination of these processes,
ally or in different combinations within the limits of quali-
except for P-No. 21 through P-No. 26, P-No. 51
fication for each process.
through P-No. 53, P-No. 61, and P-No. 62 metals.
Failure of any portion of a combination test in a single
Welding operators making groove welds in P-No. 21
test coupon constitutes failure of the entire combination.
through P-No. 26, P-No. 51 through P-No. 53, P-No. 61,
and P-No. 62 metals with the GTAW process may also
be qualified by volumetric NDE. The volumetric NDE QW-310 QUALIFICATION TEST COUPONS
shall be in accordance with QW-302.2. QW-310.1 Test Coupons. The test coupons may be
QW-305.1 Examination. Welds made in test coupons plate, pipe, or other product forms. When all position
may be examined by volumetric NDE (see QW-302.2) qualifications for pipe are accomplished by welding
or by visual and mechanical examinations (see one pipe assembly in both the 2G and 5G positions
QW-302.1, QW-302.4). Alternatively, a minimum 3 ft (1 (see Figure QW-461.4), NPS 6 (DN 150), NPS 8 (DN
m) length of the first production weld(s) made entirely 200), NPS 10 (DN 250), or larger diameter pipe shall
by the welding operator in accordance with a qualified be employed to make up the test coupon as shown in
WPS may be examined by volumetric NDE. Figure QW-463.2(f) for NPS 10 (DN 250) or larger
(a) For pipe(s) welded in the 5G, 6G, or special posi- pipe and in Figure QW-463.2(g) for NPS 6 (DN 150) or
tions, the entire production weld circumference made by NPS 8 (DN 200) diameter pipe.
the welding operator shall be examined. QW-310.2 Welding Groove With Backing. The dimen-
(b) For small diameter pipe where the required sions of the welding groove on the test coupon used in
minimum length of weld cannot be obtained from a making qualification tests for double-welded groove
single production pipe circumference, additional consec- welds or single-welded groove welds with backing
utive circumferences of the same pipe diameter made by shall be the same as those for any Welding Procedure
the welding operator shall be examined except that the Specification (WPS) qualified by the organization, or
total number of circumferences need not exceed four. shall be as shown in Figure QW-469.1.
(c) The examination technique and acceptance criteria A single-welded groove-weld test coupon with backing
for production welds shall be in accordance with QW-191. or a double-welded groove-weld test coupon shall be
QW-305.2 Failure to Meet Examination Standards. If considered welding with backing. Partial penetration
a portion of a production weld is selected for welding groove welds and fillet welds are considered welding
operator performance qualification, and it does not with backing.
meet the examination standards, the welding operator QW-310.3 Welding Groove Without Backing. The
has failed the test. In this event, the entire production dimensions of the welding groove of the test coupon
weld made by this welding operator shall be examined used in making qualification tests for single-welded

76
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

groove welds without backing shall be the same as those welds made by this welder shall be examined completely
for any WPS qualified by the organization, or as shown in and repaired by a qualified welder or welding operator.
Figure QW-469.2. (c) At the option of the organization, the welding
operator who has failed the production weld alternative
QW-320 RETESTS AND RENEWAL OF test may be retested by examining additional weld areas
equal to twice the required length or number of pipe
QUALIFICATION
circumferences of the same or consecutively made
QW-321 RETESTS production weld(s) specified in QW-305.1. If this
length of weld passes the test, the welding operator is
A welder or welding operator who fails one or more of qualified and the area of weld on which he had previously
the tests prescribed in QW-304 or QW-305, as applicable, failed the test shall be repaired by him or another qualified
may be retested under the following provisions. welder or welding operator. If this length does not meet
QW-321.1 Immediate Retest Using Visual Examina- the examination standards, the welding operator has
tion. When the qualification coupon has failed the failed the retest and all of the production welds made
visual examination of QW-302.4, retesting shall be by by this welding operator shall be examined completely
visual examination before conducting the mechanical and repaired by a qualified welder or welding operator.
testing. QW-321.4 Further Training. When the welder or the
When an immediate retest is made, the welder or welding operator has had further training or practice,
welding operator shall make two consecutive test a new test shall be made for each position on which
coupons for each position which he has failed, all of he failed to meet the requirements.
which shall pass the visual examination requirements.
The examiner may select one of the successful test QW-322 EXPIRATION, REVOCATION, AND
coupons from each set of retest coupons which pass RENEWAL OF QUALIFICATION
the visual examination for conducting the mechanical
testing. QW-322.1 Expiration. The qualification of a welder or ð23Þ
welding operator for a process remains valid provided no
QW-321.2 Immediate Retest Using Mechanical more than 6 months have passed since the welder or
Testing. When the qualification coupon has failed the welding operator last used that process. Continuity of
mechanical testing of QW-302.1, retesting shall be by qualification shall be confirmed by the qualifying or parti-
mechanical testing. cipating organization(s) as identified in QG-106.2 and
When an immediate retest is made, the welder or QG-106.3, respectively.
welding operator shall make two consecutive test A welder using manual or semiautomatic welding
coupons for each position which he has failed, all of prolongs qualification for both manual and semiautomatic
which shall pass the test requirements. welding for that process. A welding operator using
QW-321.3 Immediate Retest Using Volumetric NDE. machine welding prolongs qualification for machine
When the qualification coupon has failed the volumetric and automatic welding for that process. A welding
NDE of QW-302.2, the immediate retest shall be by the operator using automatic welding prolongs qualification
same examination method. for automatic welding for that process.
(a) For welders and welding operators the retest shall QW-322.2 Revocation. When there is a specific reason
be to examine two 6 in. (150 mm) plate coupons; for pipe, to question the welder’s or the welding operator’s ability
to examine two or more pipe coupons of the same to make welds that meet the specification, the qualifica-
diameter for a total of 12 in. (300 mm) of weld, which tions that support the welding being performed shall be
shall include the entire weld circumference for pipe or revoked. All other qualifications not questioned remain in
pipes (for small diameter pipe the total number of conse- effect.
cutively made test coupons need not exceed eight).
(b) At the option of the organization, the welder who QW-322.3 Renewal of Qualification.
has failed the production weld alternative test may be (a) Renewal of qualification that has expired under the
retested by examining additional weld areas equal to rules of QW-322.1 may be achieved for any process by
twice the required length or number of pipe circumfer- welding a single test coupon of either plate or pipe, of
ences of the same or consecutively made production any material, thickness or diameter, in any position, as
weld(s) specified in QW-304.1. If this length of weld required by QW-301 and successfully completing the
passes the test, the welder is qualified and the area of testing required by QW-302. This successful test
weld on which he had previously failed the test shall renews the welder or welding operator’s previous quali-
be repaired by him or another qualified welder. If this fications for that process for those materials, thicknesses,
length does not meet the examination standards, the diameters, positions, and other variables for which he was
welder has failed the retest and all of the production previously qualified.

77
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Providing the requirements of QW-304 and QW-305 are Table QW-353

satisfied, renewal of qualification under QW-322.1 may be Shielded Metal-Arc Welding (SMAW)
done on production work. Essential Variables
(b) Welders and welding operators whose Paragraph Brief of Variables
qualification(s) have been revoked under the provisions
QW-402 .4 − Backing
of QW-322.2 above shall requalify. Qualification shall Joints
utilize a test coupon appropriate for the revoked qualifi- QW-403 .16 ϕ Pipe diameter
cation(s). The coupon shall be welded as required by Base Metals .18 ϕ P-Number
QW-301 and tested as required by QW-302. Successful
QW-404 .15 ϕ F-Number
completion of the qualification test restores the
Filler Metals .30 ϕ t Weld deposit
revoked qualification(s).
QW-405 .1 + Position
Positions .3 ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding
QW-350 WELDING VARIABLES FOR WELDERS
QW-351 GENERAL
A welder shall be requalified whenever a change is made
in one or more of the essential variables listed for each
welding process.
Where a combination of welding processes is required
Table QW-354
to make a weldment, each welder shall be qualified for the
Semiautomatic Submerged-Arc Welding (SAW)
particular welding process or processes he will be
Essential Variables
required to use in production welding. A welder may
be qualified by making tests with each individual Paragraph Brief of Variables
welding process, or with a combination of welding QW-403 .16 ϕ Pipe diameter
processes in a single test coupon. Base Metals .18 ϕ P-Number
The limits of weld metal thickness for which he will be QW-404 .15 ϕ F-Number
qualified are dependent upon the approximate thickness Filler Metals .30 … t Weld deposit
of the weld metal he deposits with each welding process,
QW-405 .1 + Position
exclusive of any weld reinforcement, this thickness shall Positions
be considered the test coupon thickness as given in
QW-452.
In any given production weldment, welders may not
deposit a thickness greater than that permitted by
QW-452 for each welding process in which they are qual-
ified.
Table QW-355
Table QW-352 Semiautomatic Gas Metal-Arc Welding (GMAW)
Oxyfuel Gas Welding (OFW) [This Includes Flux-Cored Arc Welding (FCAW)]
Essential Variables Essential Variables
Paragraph Brief of Variables Paragraph Brief of Variables
QW-402 .7 + Backing QW-402 .4 − Backing
Joints Joints
QW-403 .2 … Maximum qualified QW-403 .16 ϕ Pipe diameter
Base Metals Base Metals .18 ϕ P-Number
.18 ϕ P-Number
QW-404 .14 ± Filler QW-404 .15 ϕ F-Number
Filler Metals Filler Metals .30 ϕ t Weld deposit
.15 ϕ F-Number
.31 ϕ t Weld deposit .32 … t Limit (S. Cir. Arc.)
QW-405 .1 + Position QW-405 .1 + Position
Positions Positions .3 ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding
QW-408 .7 ϕ Type fuel gas QW-408 .8 − Backing gas
Gas Gas
QW-409 .2 ϕ Transfer mode
Electrical

78
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-356 Table QW-358

Manual and Semiautomatic Gas Manual and Semiautomatic Laser Beam Welding (LBW) ð23Þ
Tungsten-Arc Welding (GTAW) Paragraph Brief of Variables
Essential Variables
QW-402 .4 − Backing
Paragraph Brief of Variables Joints
QW-402 .4 − Backing QW-403 .16 ϕ Pipe diameter
Joints Base Metals .18 ϕ P-Number
QW-403 .16 ϕ Pipe diameter .14 ± Filler
Base Metals .18 ϕ P-Number .15 ϕ F-Number
.14 ± Filler QW-404
.22 ± Inserts
Filler Metals
.15 ϕ F-Number .23 ϕ Filler metal product form
QW-404
.22 ± Inserts .30 ϕ t Weld deposit
Filler Metals
.23 ϕ Filler metal product form .1 + Position
QW-405
.30 ϕ t Weld deposit Positions .3 ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding
QW-405 .1 + Position QW-408 .8 − Backing gas
Positions .3 ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding Gas
QW-408 .8 − Backing gas QW-410 .68 ϕ Type of equipment
Gas Technique .88 ϕ Technique
QW-409 .4 ϕ Current or polarity .89 ± Oscillation
Electrical
.90 ϕ Mode of operation
Legend:
Legend:
ϕ Change ↑ Uphill
ϕ Change ↑ Uphill
+ Addition ↓ Downhill
+ Addition ↓ Downhill
− Deletion
− Deletion

Table QW-357
Manual and Semiautomatic Plasma-Arc Welding (PAW) QW-360 WELDING VARIABLES FOR WELDING
Essential Variables OPERATORS
Paragraph Brief of Variables
QW-361 GENERAL
QW-402 .4 − Backing
Joints A welding operator shall be requalified whenever a
QW-403 .16 ϕ Pipe diameter change is made in one of the following essential variables
Base Metals .18 ϕ P-Number (see QW-361.1 and QW-361.2). There may be exceptions
.14 ± Filler
or additional requirements for the processes of QW-362,
QW-363, and the special processes of QW-380.
.15 ϕ F-Number
QW-404 QW-361.1 Essential Variables — Automatic Welding. ð23Þ
.22 ± Inserts
Filler Metals
.23 ϕ Filler metal product form (a) A change from automatic to machine welding.
.30 ϕ t Weld deposit (b) A change in the welding process.
QW-405 .1 + Position (c) For electron beam and laser welding, the addition or
Positions .3 ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding deletion of filler metal.
QW-408 .8 − Backing gas (d) For laser welding and hybrid welding using lasers, a
Gas change in laser type (e.g., a change from CO2 to YAG).
(e) For friction welding (excluding friction stir
Legend:
welding), a change from continuous drive to inertia
ϕ Change ↑ Uphill welding or vice versa.
+ Addition ↓ Downhill (f) For electron beam welding, a change from vacuum
− Deletion to out-of-vacuum equipment, and vice versa.

QW-361.2 Essential Variables — Machine Welding.

(a) A change in the welding process.
(b) A change from direct visual control to remote visual
control and vice versa.

79
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

(c) The deletion of an automatic arc voltage control QW-381.2 The qualification test coupon for perfor-
system for GTAW. mance qualification shall consist of base metal not less
(d) The deletion of automatic joint tracking. than 6 in. (150 mm) × 6 in. (150 mm). The weld
(e) The addition of welding positions other than those overlay cladding shall be a minimum of 1 1 ∕ 2 in. (38
already qualified (see QW-120, QW-130, and QW-303). mm) wide by approximately 6 in. (150 mm) long. For
(f) For GTAW, PAW, and LLBW, the deletion of consum- qualification on pipe, the pipe length shall be a
able inserts, except that qualification with consumable minimum of 6 in. (150 mm) and the diameter shall be
inserts shall also qualify for fillet welds and welds the minimum needed to allow the required number of
with backing. test specimens. The weld overlay shall be continuous
(g) The deletion of backing. Double-welded groove around the circumference of the test coupon. For
welds are considered welding with backing. processes depositing a weld bead width greater than
1
(h) A change from single pass per side to multiple ∕2 in. (13 mm) wide, the weld overlay shall consist of
passes per side but not the reverse. a minimum of three weld beads in the first layer.
(i) For hybrid plasma-GMAW welding, the essential (a) The test coupon shall be sectioned to make side-
variable for welding operator qualification shall be in bend test specimens perpendicular to the direction of
accordance with Table QW-357. the welding in accordance with QW-161. For coupons
that are less than 3∕8 in. (10 mm) thick, the width of
ð23Þ QW-362 ELECTRON BEAM WELDING (EBW), LASER the side-bend specimens may be reduced to the thickness
BEAM WELDING (LBW), HYBRID of the test coupon. Test specimens shall be removed at
WELDING, AND FRICTION WELDING locations specified in Figure QW-462.5(c) or Figure
(FRW) QW-462.5(d).
(b) Welders or welding operators who pass the tests for
The welding operator performance qualification test corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay cladding shall only
coupon shall be production parts or test coupons that be qualified to apply corrosion-resistant weld metal
have joint designs permitted by any qualified WPS. The overlay portion of a groove weld joining clad materials
coupon shall be mechanically tested in accordance or lined materials.
with QW-452. Alternatively, when the part or coupon (c) The essential variables of QW-350 and QW-360
does not readily lend itself to the preparation of bend shall apply for welders and welding operators, respec-
test specimens, the part may be cut so that at least tively, except there is no limit on the maximum thickness
two full-thickness weld cross sections are exposed. of corrosion-resistant overlay that may be applied in
Those cross sections shall be smoothed and etched production. When specified as essential variables, the
with a suitable etchant (see QW-470) to give a clear defi- limitations of position and diameter qualified for
nition of the weld metal and heat-affected zone. The weld groove welds shall apply to overlay welds, except the
metal and heat-affected zone shall exhibit complete fusion limitations on diameter qualified shall apply only to
and freedom from cracks. The essential variables for welds deposited in the circumferential direction.
welding operator qualification shall be in accordance
with QW-361. QW-381.3 Qualification on Clad Materials. A welder
or welding operator who has qualified on clad material or
QW-363 STUD WELDING lined material as provided in QW-383.1(b) is also qualified
to deposit corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay.
Stud welding operators shall be performance qualified
in accordance with the test requirements of QW-192.2 and QW-381.4 Alternative Qualification With Groove
the position requirements of QW-303.4. Weld Tests. When a chemical composition is not specified
in the WPS, welders or welding operators who success-
QW-380 SPECIAL PROCESSES fully complete a groove weld performance qualification
test meeting the corrosion-resistant overlay bend test re-
QW-381 CORROSION-RESISTANT WELD METAL quirements of QW-163 may be considered qualified for
OVERLAY corrosion-resistant overlay welding within the ranges
defined in QW-350 or QW-360.
ð23Þ QW-381.1 For welders, the limits of base metal thick-
ness qualification shall be as specified in Table QW-453. QW-382 HARD-FACING WELD METAL OVERLAY
Welding operator qualifications are not limited by base (WEAR RESISTANT)
metal thicknesses other than as stated in the WPS. For
welders and welding operators, the required examina- QW-382.1 Qualification Test. ð23Þ
tions, tests, and test specimens shall be as specified in (a) The test base metal coupon for performance quali-
QW-381.2 and Table QW-453. Base material test fication shall have minimum dimensions of 6 in. (150 mm)
coupons may be as permitted in QW-423. wide × approximately 6 in. (150 mm) long with a hard-

80
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

faced layer a minimum of 11∕2 in. (38 mm) wide × 6 in. (150 QW-383 JOINING OF CLAD MATERIALS AND
mm) long. The minimum hard-faced thickness shall be as APPLIED LININGS
specified in the WPS. Alternatively, the qualification may
be performed on a test base metal coupon that represents QW-383.1 Clad Materials.
the size of the production part. For qualification on pipe, (a) Welders and welding operators who will join the
the pipe length shall be 6 in. (150 mm) minimum and the base material portion of clad materials shall be qualified
diameter shall be the minimum needed to allow the for groove welding in accordance with QW-301. Welders
required number of test specimens. The weld overlay and welding operators who will apply the cladding portion
shall be continuous around the circumference of the of a weld between clad materials shall be qualified in
test coupon. accordance with QW-381. Welders and welding operators
(b) The base metal shall be sectioned transversely to need only be qualified for the portions of clad material
the direction of the hard-facing overlay. The two faces of welds that they will make in production.
the hard facing exposed by sectioning shall be polished (b) As an alternative to (a), welders and welding opera-
and etched with a suitable etchant and shall be visually tors may be qualified using clad material test coupons. The
examined with 5X magnification for cracks in the base test coupon shall be at least 3∕8 in. (10 mm) thick and of
metal or the heat-affected zone, lack of fusion, or other dimensions such that a groove weld can be made to join
linear defects. The overlay and base metal shall meet the base materials and the corrosion-resistant weld metal
the requirements specified in the WPS. All exposed overlay can be applied to the completed groove weld. Four
faces shall be examined. See Figure QW-462.5(b) for side-bend test specimens shall be removed from the
pipe and Figure QW-462.5(e) for plate. completed test coupon and tested. The groove weld
(c) At a thickness greater than or equal to the minimum portion and the corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay
thickness specified in the WPS, the weld surface shall be portion of the test coupon shall be evaluated using the
examined by the liquid penetrant method and shall meet respective criteria in QW-163. Welders and welding
the acceptance standards in QW-195.2 or as specified in operators qualified using clad material test coupons
the WPS. Liquid penetrant examiners shall meet the re- are qualified to join base materials as provided by
quirements in QW-195.3. Surface conditioning prior to QW-301, and they are qualified to apply corrosion-resis-
liquid penetrant examination is permitted. tant weld metal overlay as provided by QW-381.
(d) For welders, the limits of base metal thickness
qualification shall be as specified in Table QW-453. QW-383.2 Applied Linings.
Welding operator qualifications are not limited by base (a) Welders and welding operators shall be qualified
metal thicknesses other than as stated in the WPS. For following the rules for making groove or fillet welds in
welders and welding operators, the required examina- accordance with QW-301. Plug welds for attaching
tions, tests, and test specimens shall be as specified in applied linings shall be considered equivalent to fillet
Table QW-453. Base material test coupons may be as welds for the purpose of performance qualification.
permitted in QW-423. (b) An alternate test coupon shall consist of the
(e) Welders and welding operators who pass the tests geometry to be welded, except the base material need
for hard-facing weld metal overlay are qualified for hard- not exceed 1 in. (25 mm) in thickness. The welded test
facing overlay only. coupon shall be sectioned and etched to reveal the
(f) The essential variable, of QW-350 and QW-360, shall weld and heat-affected zone. The weld shall show pene-
apply for welders and welding operators, respectively, tration into the base metal.
except there is no limit on the maximum thickness of
hard-facing overlay that may be applied in production. QW-384 RESISTANCE WELDING OPERATOR
When specified as essential variables, the limitations of QUALIFICATION
position and diameter qualified for groove welds shall
apply to overlay welds except the limitations on diameter Each welding operator shall be tested on each machine
qualified shall apply only to welds deposited in the circum- type which he will use. Qualification testing on any P-No.
ferential direction. 21 through P-No. 26 metal shall qualify the operator for all
(g) For welders, qualification with one AWS classifica- metals. Qualification on any P-No. 1 through P-No. 15F or
tion within an SFA specification qualifies for all other AWS any P-No. 41 through P-No. 49 metals shall qualify the
classifications in that SFA specification. Welding operator operator for all P-No. 1 through P-No. 15F and P-No.
qualifications are not limited by AWS classification other 41 through P-No. 49 metals. Qualification testing on
than as stated in the WPS. any P-No. 51 through P-No. 53, P-No. 61, or P-No. 62
metal shall qualify the operator for all P-No. 51
through P-No. 53, P-No. 61, and P-No. 62 metals.

81
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

(a) Qualification for spot and projection welding shall (c) If specific qualification test requirements are not
consist of making a set of ten consecutive welds, five of invoked by the applicable Code Section, welders and
which shall be subjected to mechanical shear tests or peel welding operators shall be qualified with one of the
tests, and five to macro-examination. Examination, following methods:
testing, and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance (1) a demonstration mockup per the requirements of
with QW-196. QW-193.2, except that for welding operators
(b) Qualification for seam welding shall consist of that (-a) the hole pattern does not need to be dupli-
testing specified in QW-286.3, except that only one trans- cated
verse cross section and one longitudinal cross section are (-b) the type or model of equipment is an essential
required. variable
(2) a groove-weld qualification per the requirements
QW-385 FLASH WELDING OPERATOR of QW-303.1
QUALIFICATION (3) a fillet weld qualification per the requirements of
QW-303.2 when a tube-to-tubesheet joint is made with a
Each welding operator shall be tested by welding a test
fillet weld
coupon following any WPS. The test coupon shall be
welded and tested in accordance with QW-199. Qualifica-
Table QW-388
tion following any flash welding WPS qualifies the
Essential Variables for Tube-to-Tubesheet
operator to follow all flash welding WPSs.
Performance Qualification
Production weld sampling tests required by other
(All Welding Processes)
Sections may be used to qualify welding operators. The
test method, extent of tests, and acceptance criteria of Paragraph Brief of Variables
the other Sections and QW-199.2 shall be met when QW-402 .31 ≤ Ligament size
this is done. Joints .32 ϕ Joint configuration
QW-403 .16 ϕ Tube diameter
QW-386 DIFFUSION WELDING OPERATOR Base Metals .32 ϕ Tube thickness
QUALIFICATION
QW-404 .58 ± Preplaced filler metal
Each welding operator shall be tested by welding a Filler Metals
procedure qualification test coupon in accordance with QW-409 .10 ϕ Amperage
QW-185.1. The coupon shall be metallographically exam- Electrical
ined in accordance with QW-185.3. Legend:
ϕ Change ≤ Less than or equal to
QW-387 TUBE-TO-TUBESHEET WELDER AND
± Addition or deletion
WELDING OPERATOR QUALIFICATION
(a) When the applicable Code Section requires the use
QW-389 CAPACITOR DISCHARGE WELDING
of QW-193 for tube-to-tubesheet demonstration mockup
OPERATOR QUALIFICATION
qualification tests, QW-193.2 shall apply.
(b) Essential performance qualification variables ap- Welding operators using low-energy capacitor
plicable for each welding process listed in QW-350 or discharge welding in accordance with QW-289 are not
QW-360 shall apply, in addition to any applicable variables required to be qualified.
shown in Table QW-388.

82
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

ARTICLE IV
WELDING DATA

QW-400 VARIABLES each welding process are summarized in Table

QW-416 for performance qualification.
QW-401 GENERAL
QW-402 JOINTS
Each welding variable described in this Article is appli-
cable as an essential, supplementary essential, or nones- QW-402.1 A change in the type of groove (Vee-groove,
sential variable for procedure qualification when U-groove, single-bevel, double-bevel, etc.).
referenced in QW-250 for each specific welding QW-402.2 The addition or deletion of a backing.
process. Essential variables for performance qualification
are referenced in QW-350 for each specific welding QW-402.3 A change in the nominal composition of the
process. A change from one welding process to backing.
another welding process is an essential variable and QW-402.4 The deletion of the backing in single-welded
requires requalification. groove welds. Double-welded groove welds are consid-
ð23Þ QW-401.1 Supplementary Essential Variable (Proce- ered welding with backing.
dure). Supplementary essential variables are in addition QW-402.5 The addition of a backing or a change in its
to the essential variables for each welding process. nominal composition.
When a procedure has been previously qualified to
satisfy all requirements other than toughness, it is QW-402.6 An increase in the fit-up gap, beyond that
then necessary only to prepare an additional test initially qualified.
coupon using the same procedure with the same essential QW-402.7 The addition of backing.
variables, but additionally with all of the required supple-
mentary essential variables, with the coupon long enough QW-402.8 A change in nominal size or shape of the
to provide the necessary toughness specimens. stud at the section to be welded.
When a procedure has been previously qualified to QW-402.9 In stud welding, a change in shielding as a
satisfy all requirements including toughness, but one result of ferrule or flux type.
or more supplementary essential variables are
changed, then it is only necessary to prepare an additional QW-402.10 A change in the specified root spacing.
test coupon using the same welding procedure and the QW-402.11 The addition or deletion of nonmetallic
new supplementary essential variable(s), with the retainers or nonfusing metal retainers.
coupon long enough to provide the necessary toughness
specimens. QW-402.12 The welding procedure qualification test
When essential variables are qualified by one or more shall duplicate the joint configuration to be used in
PQRs and supplementary essential variables are qualified production within the limits listed, except that pipe or
by other PQRs, the ranges of essential variables estab- tube to pipe or tube may be used for qualification of a
lished by the former PQRs are only affected by the pipe or tube to other shapes, and solid round to solid
latter to the extent specified in the applicable supplemen- round may be used for qualification of a solid round to
tary essential variable (e.g., essential variable QW-403.8 other shapes
governs the minimum and maximum thickness of base (a) any change exceeding ±10 deg in the angle
metal qualified. When supplementary essential variable measured for the plane of either face to be joined, to
QW-403.6 applies, it modifies only the minimum thickness the axis of rotation
qualified, not the maximum). (b) a change in cross-sectional area of the weld joint
greater than 10%
QW-401.2 The welding data includes the welding vari- (c) a change in the outside diameter of the cylindrical
ables grouped as joints, base metals, filler metals, position, weld interface of the assembly greater than ± 10%
preheat, postweld heat treatment, gas, electrical charac- (d) a change from solid to tubular cross section at the
teristics, and technique. For convenience, variables for joint or vice versa regardless of (b)

83
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-402.13 A change in the method of joining from QW-402.27 A change in material of fixed backing anvils
spot to projection to seam or vice versa. (when used). A change in backing anvil design that affects
the weld cooling rate (e.g., a change from air-cooled to
QW-402.14 An increase or decrease of more than 10%
water-cooled, and vice versa). This variable is not appli-
in the spacing of the welds when they are within two
cable to tube-to-tubesheet or double-sided welds with
diameters of each other.
overlapping fusion zones, or welds completed using
QW-402.15 A change in the size or shape of the projec- self-reacting pins.
tion in projection welding.
QW-402.28 A change in joint design from that quali-
QW-402.16 A decrease in the distance between the fied, including edge preparation geometry (e.g., a change
approximate weld interface and the final surface of the from square butt edge to beveled edge), reductions in the
production corrosion-resistant or hard-facing weld smallest joint path radius to less than the shoulder radius,
metal overlay below the minimum thickness qualified or joint paths crossing themselves or another HAZ.
as shown in Figures QW-462.5(a) through
QW-402.29 A change in joint spacing greater than
QW-462.5(e). There is no limit on the maximum thickness
±10% of the qualification test coupon thickness. For
for corrosion-resistant or hard-facing weld metal overlay
WPSs qualified using intimate edge contact, the
that may be used in production.
maximum allowable joint spacing is 1∕16 in. (1.5 mm).
QW-402.17 An increase in the thickness of the produc-
QW-402.31 A decrease of 10% or more in the specified
tion spray fuse hard-facing deposit above the thickness
width of the ligament between tube holes when the speci-
deposited on the procedure qualification test coupon.
fied width of the ligament is less than the greater of 3∕8 in.
QW-402.18 For lap joints, (10 mm) or three times the specified tube wall thickness.
(a) a decrease of more than 10% in the distance to the
QW-402.32 For tube-to-tubesheet welding: an
edge of the material
increase in the depth by more than 10%, an increase
(b) an increase in the number of layers of material
or decrease in the preparation angle of the weld
(c) a change in surface preparation or finish from that
groove by more than 5 deg, or a change in the groove type.
qualified
QW-402.19 A change in the nominal diameter or QW-403 BASE METALS
nominal thickness for tubular cross sections, or an QW-403.1 A change from a base metal listed under one
increase in the total cross section area beyond that qual- P-Number in Table QW/QB-422 to a metal listed under
ified for all nontubular cross sections. another P-Number or to any other base metal. When
QW-402.20 A change in the joint configuration. joints are made between two base metals that have
different P-Numbers, a procedure qualification shall be
QW-402.21 A change in the method or equipment used made for the applicable combination of P-Numbers,
to minimize internal flash. even though qualification tests have been made for
QW-402.22 A change in the end preparation method. each of the two base metals welded to itself.
QW-402.23 For test coupons less than 11∕2 in. (38 mm) QW-403.2 The maximum thickness qualified is the
thick, the addition of a cooling medium (water, flowing gas, thickness of the test coupon.
etc.) to the back side of the weld. Qualification on test
coupons less than 11∕2 in. (38 mm) thick with a cooling QW-403.3
medium on the back side of the weld qualifies base (a) For full penetration single-sided welds without
metal thickness equal to or greater than the test backing where the verification of penetration can be
coupon thickness with and without coolant. made, an increase of more than 20% in base metal thick-
QW-402.24 Qualification with a cooling medium ness when the test coupon thickness is less than or equal to
(water, flowing gas, etc.) on the root side of a test 1 in. (25 mm), and more than 10% in base metal thickness
coupon weld that is welded from one side qualifies all when the test coupon thickness is greater than 1 in. (25
thicknesses of base metal with cooling medium down mm).
to the thickness of the test coupon at the root or 1∕2 in. (b) For all other welds, an increase of more than 10% in
(13 mm), whichever is less. base metal thickness when the test coupon thickness is
less than or equal to 1 in. (25 mm), and more than 5%
QW-402.25 A change from lap joint to groove welding, in base metal thickness when the test coupon thickness
and vice versa. is greater than 1 in. (25 mm).
QW-402.26 A reduction of more than 5 deg in the edge QW-403.4 Welding procedure qualifications shall be
preparation bevel angle for groove welds. made using a base metal of the same type or grade or
another base metal listed in the same group (see

84
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW/QB-422) as the base metal to be used in produc- QW-403.10 ð23Þ

tion welding. When joints are to be made between base
metals from two different groups, a procedure qualifica- DELETED
tion must be made for the applicable combination of base
QW-403.11 Base metals specified in the WPS shall be
metals, even though procedure qualification tests have
qualified by a procedure qualification test that was made
been made for each of the two base metals welded to itself.
using base metals in accordance with QW-424.
QW-403.5 Welding procedure specifications shall be
QW-403.12 A change from a base metal listed under
qualified using one of the following:
one P-Number of Table QW/QB-422 to a base metal listed
(a) the same base metal (including type or grade) to be
under another P-Number. When joints are made between
used in production welding
two base metals that have different P-Numbers, requal-
(b) for ferrous materials, a base metal listed in the same
ification is required even though the two base metals have
P-Number Group Number in Table QW/QB-422 as the
been independently qualified using the same procedure.
base metal to be used in production welding
When the melt-in technique is used for joining P-No. 1, P-
(c) for nonferrous materials, a base metal listed with
No. 3, P-No. 4, and P-No. 5A, a procedure qualification test
the same P-Number UNS Number in Table QW/QB-422 as
with one P-Number metal shall also qualify for that P-
the base metal to be used in production welding
Number metal welded to each of the lower P-Number
For ferrous materials in Table QW/QB-422, a procedure
metals, but not vice versa.
qualification shall be made for each P-Number Group
Number combination of base metals, even though proce- QW-403.15 Welding procedure qualifications for elec-
dure qualification tests have been made for each of the two tron beam welding shall be made using a base metal of the
base metals welded to itself. If, however, two or more same type or grade or another base metal listed in the
qualification records have the same essential and supple- same P-Number (and the same group where given —
mentary essential variables, except that the base metals see Table QW/QB-422) as the base metal to be used in
are assigned to different Group Numbers within the same production welding. When joints are to be made
P-Number, then the combination of base metals is also between base metals from two different P-Numbers
qualified. In addition, when base metals of two different (or two different groups), a procedure qualification
Group Numbers within the same P-Number are qualified must be made for the applicable combination of base
using a single test coupon, that coupon qualifies the metals even though procedure qualification tests have
welding of those two Group Numbers within the same been made for each of the two base metals welded to itself.
P-Number to themselves as well as to each other using
QW-403.16 A change in the pipe diameter beyond the
the variables qualified.
range qualified in QW-452, except as otherwise permitted
This variable does not apply when toughness testing of
in QW-303.1, QW-303.2, QW-381.2(c), or QW-382.1(f).
the heat-affected zone is not required by the referencing
For tube-to-tubesheet welding: an increase or decrease
code, standard, or specification.
greater than 10% of the specified tube diameter.
QW-403.6 The minimum base metal thickness quali- (a) For a groove weld attaching a set-on nozzle or
fied is the thickness of the test coupon T or 5∕8 in. (16 mm), branch (with the weld preparation on the nozzle or
whichever is less. However, where T is 1∕4 in. (6 mm) or branch), the range qualified from Table QW-452.3 shall
less, the minimum thickness qualified is 1∕2T. This variable be based on the nozzle or branch pipe O.D.
does not apply for any of the following conditions: (b) For a groove weld attaching a set-in nozzle or
(a) WPS is qualified with a heat treatment above the branch (with the weld preparation on the shell, head,
upper transformation temperature. or run pipe), the range qualified from Table QW-452.3
(b) WPS is for welding austenitic or P-10H material and shall be based on the shell, head, or run pipe O.D.
is qualified with a solution heat treatment.
QW-403.17 In stud welding, a change in combination of
(c) Base metals are assigned to P-No. 8, P-Nos. 21
base metal listed under one P-Number in
through 26, and P-Nos. 41 through 49.
Table QW/QB-422 and stud metal P-Number (as
QW-403.8 A change in base metal thickness beyond defined in the following Note), or to any other base
the range qualified in QW-451, except as otherwise metal and stud metal combination.
permitted by QW-202.4(b). NOTE: Stud metal shall be classified by nominal chemical compo-
QW-403.9 For single-pass or multipass welding in sition and can be assigned a P-Number when it meets the nominal
composition of any one of the P-Number metals.
which any pass is greater than 1∕2 in. (13 mm) thick,
an increase in base metal thickness beyond 1.1 times
QW-403.18 A change from one P-Number to any other
that of the qualification test coupon.
P-Number or to a base metal not listed in
Table QW/QB-422, except as permitted in QW-423,
and in QW-420. For tube-to-tubesheet welding: a

85
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

change in the P-Number or A-Number of the tubesheet member of a joint between P-No. 1 and P-No. 8
cladding material (if the cladding material is part of metals) or where cladding is being applied or repaired
the weld). using temper bead techniques, qualification in accordance
with QW-290 is required only for the portion of the WPS
QW-403.19 A change to another base material type or
that applies to welding on the member to be temper bead
grade (type or grade are materials of the same nominal
welded.
chemical analysis and mechanical property range, even
though of different product form), or to any other base QW-403.26 An increase in the base metal carbon
material type or grade. When joints are made between equivalent using the following equation:
two different types or grades of base material, a procedure Mn Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
qualification must be made for the applicable combina- CE = C + + +
6 5 15
tions of materials, even though procedure qualification
tests have been made for each of the two base materials QW-403.27 The maximum thickness qualified is the
welded to itself. thickness of the test coupon, T, or it is unlimited if the
QW-403.20 If the chemical composition of the weld test coupon is 1 1 ∕ 2 in. (38 mm) thick or thicker.
metal overlay is specified in the WPS, a change in the However, where T is 1 ∕ 4 in. (6 mm) or less, the
P-Number listed in Table QW/QB-422 to another P- maximum thickness qualified is 2T. This limitation
Number or unlisted base metal, or a change in Group applies to fillet welds as well as to groove welds.
Number for P-No. 10 or P-No. 11 base metals. QW-403.28 A change to another base metal type,
If the chemical composition of the weld metal overlay is grade, or UNS number.
not specified in the WPS, qualification on P-No. 5A or any
lower P-Number base metal also qualifies for weld metal QW-403.29 A change in the surface finish as defined by
overlay on all lower P-Number base metals. the material specification or established surface rough-
ness range as measured in accordance with ASME
QW-403.21 The addition or deletion of a coating, B46.1–2006.
plating or cladding, or a change in the nominal chemical
analysis or thickness range of the plating or cladding, or a QW-403.30 A change in base metal thickness greater
change in type of coating as specified in the WPS. than 20%
(a) of the test coupon thickness for fixed-pin and
QW-403.22 A change in the base metal thickness retracting-pin rotating tools
exceeding 10% of the thickness of the total joint from (b) beyond the minimum and maximum thickness or
that qualified. thickness transition slopes of the test coupon for self-
QW-403.23 A change in base metal thickness beyond reacting rotating tools
the range qualified in Table QW-453. QW-403.32 For tubes of specified wall thickness of
QW-403.24 A change in the specification, type, or 0.100 in. (2.5 mm) or less, a change in tube wall thickness
grade of the base metal. When joints are to be made to increase it to more than 2T or to decrease it to less than
1
between two different base metals, a procedure qualifica- ∕2T. For tubes of specified wall thickness greater than
tion must be made for the applicable combination even 0.100 in. (2.5 mm), only one qualification test is required.
though procedure qualifications have been made for QW-403.33 A change in the P-Number of either the
each of the two base metals welded to themselves. tube or tubesheet material. Where the cladding or
QW-403.25 Welding procedure qualifications shall be overlay material is part of the weld, a change in the P-
made using a base metal of the same P-Number and Group Number or A-Number or in the nominal composition
Number as the base metal to be temper bead welded. of the tubesheet cladding or overlay material when a
When joints are to be made between base metals from P-Number or A-Number is not assigned.
two different P-Number and Group Number combinations, QW-403.34 A change in the specified tube wall thick-
a temper bead procedure qualification must be made for ness or diameter greater than 10% for all diameters and
each base metal P-Number and Group Number combina- wall thicknesses.
tion to be used in production; this may be done in separate
test coupons or in combination on a single test coupon. QW-403.35 A change from a base metal listed under ð23Þ
When base metals of different P-Number and Group one P-Number in Table QW/QB-422 to a base metal listed
Number combinations are tested in the same coupon, under another P-Number or to an unassigned base metal.
the welding variables utilized and test results on each In addition, for base metals listed in P-Nos. 1 through 7 and
member of the coupon shall be documented indepen- 9A through 15F, an increase in the carbon equivalent as
dently but may be reported on the same qualification defined by the formula in QW-403.26. When joints are
record. Where temper bead welding is to be applied to made between base metals with different P-Numbers
only one member of a joint (e.g., on the P-No. 1 or unassigned base metals, a procedure qualification

86
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

shall be made for the applicable combination of P-Number manufacturer’s or supplier’s certificate of conformance
or unassigned base metal, even though qualification tests when the flux used was the same as that used to weld
have been made for each of the two base metals welded to the procedure qualification test coupon.
themselves. In lieu of an A-Number designation, the nominal chem-
ical composition of the weld deposit shall be indicated on
ð23Þ QW-403.36 A change in the layer width beyond the
the WPS and on the PQR. Designation of nominal chemical
range qualified, as shown in Table QW-613.
composition may also be by reference to the AWS classi-
QW-404 FILLER METALS fication except for the “G” suffix classification, by the
manufacturer’s trade name, or by other established
QW-404.1 An increase of greater than 10% in the procurement documents.
cross-sectional area of the filler metal added (excluding
buttering) or in the wire-feed speed beyond that qualified. QW-404.6 A change in the nominal size of the elec-
trode or electrodes specified in the WPS.
QW-404.2 A decrease in the thickness or change in
nominal specified chemical analysis of weld metal QW-404.8 Addition or deletion, or a change of more
buttering beyond that qualified. (Buttering or surfacing than 10% in the nominal amount or composition of
is the deposition of weld metal on one or both faces of supplementary deoxidation material (in addition to
the joint prior to preparation of the joint for final electron filler metal) beyond that qualified.
beam welding.) QW-404.9
QW-404.3 A change in the size of the filler metal. (a) A change in the indicator for minimum tensile
QW-404.4 A change from one F-Number in strength (e.g., the 7 in F7A2-EM12K) when the flux
Table QW-432 to any other F-Number or to any other wire combination is classified in Section II, Part C.
filler metal not listed in Table QW-432. (b) A change in either the flux trade name or wire trade
name when neither the flux nor the wire is classified in
QW-404.5 (Applicable only to ferrous metals.) A Section II, Part C.
change in the chemical composition of the weld (c) A change in the flux trade name when the wire is
deposit from one A-Number to any other A-Number in classified in Section II, Part C but the flux is not classified. A
Table QW-442. Qualification with A-No. 1 shall qualify change in the wire classification within the requirements
for A-No. 2 and vice versa. of QW-404.5 does not require requalification.
The weld metal chemical composition may be deter- (d) A change in the flux trade name for A-No. 8 deposits.
mined by any of the following:
(a) For all welding processes — from the chemical QW-404.10 Where the alloy content of the weld metal
analysis of the weld deposit taken from the procedure is largely dependent upon the composition of the flux used,
qualification test coupon. any change in any part of the welding procedure which
(b) For SMAW — from the chemical analysis of an undi- would result in the important alloying elements in the
luted weld deposit such as that prepared according to SFA- weld metal being outside of the specification range of
5.5 filler metal specification, including the chemical chemistry given in the Welding Procedure Specification.
composition as reported either in the filler metal speci- QW-404.12 A change in any of the following: ð23Þ
fication or the manufacturer’s or supplier’s certificate of (a) filler metal classification within an SFA specifica-
conformance. tion
(c) For GTAW, LBW, and PAW — from the chemical (b) trade name of the filler metal when the filler metal is
analysis of an undiluted weld deposit such as that not classified within an SFA specification
prepared according to SFA-5.28 GTAW filler metal spec- (c) trade name of the filler metal when the filler metal
ification or from the chemical composition of a fully classification within an SFA specification includes a “G”
metallic solid welding consumable as reported in suffix
either the filler metal specification or the manufacturer’s When a filler metal conforms to a filler metal classifica-
or supplier’s certificate of conformance. tion within an SFA specification, except for the “G” suffix
(d) For GMAW and EGW — from the chemical analysis classification, requalification is not required if a change is
of an undiluted weld deposit such as that prepared made in any of the following:
according to SFA-5.28 filler metal specification, including – from a filler metal that is designated as moisture-
the manufacturer’s or supplier’s certificate of confor- resistant to one that is not designated as moisture-resis-
mance when the shielding gas used was the same as tant and vice versa (e.g., from E7018R to E7018)
that used to weld the procedure qualification test coupon. – from one diffusible hydrogen level to another (e.g.,
(e) For SAW — from the chemical analysis of an undi- from E7018-H8 to E7018-H16)
luted weld deposit such as that prepared according to SFA-
5.23 multiple pass filler metal specification, including the

87
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

– for carbon, low alloy, and stainless steel filler metals (c) flux coated (solid or metal cored)
having the same minimum tensile strength and the same (d) powder
nominal chemical composition, a change from one low
QW-404.24 The addition, deletion, or change of more
hydrogen coating type to another low hydrogen
than 10% in the volume of supplemental filler metal.
coating type (e.g., a change among EXX15, 16, or 18 or
EXXX15, 16, or 17 classifications) QW-404.27 Where the alloy content of the weld metal
– from one position-usability designation to another is largely dependent upon the composition of the supple-
for flux-cored electrodes (e.g., a change from E70T-1 to mental filler metal (including powder filler metal for
E71T-1 or vice versa) PAW), any change in any part of the welding procedure
– from a classification that requires toughness testing that would result in the important alloying elements in the
to the same classification which has a suffix which indi- weld metal being outside of the specification range of
cates that toughness testing was performed at a lower chemistry given in the Welding Procedure Specification.
temperature or exhibited greater toughness at the
QW-404.29 A change in the flux trade name and des-
required temperature or both, as compared to the classi-
ignation.
fication which was used during procedure qualification
(e.g., a change from E7018 to E7018-1) QW-404.30 A change in deposited weld metal thick-
– from the classification qualified to another filler ness beyond that qualified in accordance with QW-451 for
metal within the same SFA specification when the procedure qualification or QW-452 for performance quali-
weld metal is exempt from toughness testing by other fication, except as otherwise permitted in QW-303.1 and
Sections QW-303.2. When a welder is qualified using volumetric
This exemption does not apply to hard-facing and corro- examination, the maximum thickness stated in Table
sion-resistant overlays QW-452.1(b) applies.
QW-404.14 The deletion or addition of filler metal. QW-404.31 The maximum thickness qualified is the
thickness of the test coupon.
QW-404.15 A change from one F-Number in
Table QW-432 to any other F-Number or to any other QW-404.32 For the low voltage short-circuiting type of
filler metal, except as permitted in QW-433. gas metal-arc process when the deposited weld metal
thickness is less than 1∕2 in. (13 mm) , an increase in depos-
QW-404.17 A change in the type of flux or composition
ited weld metal thickness beyond 1.1 times that of the
of the flux.
qualification test deposited weld metal thickness. For
QW-404.18 A change from wire to plate electrodes, weld metal thicknesses of 1∕2 in. (13 mm) and greater,
and vice versa. use Table QW-451.1, Table QW-451.2, or Tables
QW-452.1(a) and QW-452.1(b), as applicable.
QW-404.19 A change from consumable guide to
nonconsumable guide, and vice versa. QW-404.33 A change in the filler metal classification
within an SFA specification, or, if not conforming to a filler
QW-404.20 Any change in the method by which filler
metal classification within an SFA specification, a change
metal is added, such as preplaced shim, top strip, wire,
in the manufacturer’s trade name for the filler metal. When
wire feed, or prior weld metal buttering of one or both
optional supplemental designators, such as those which
joint faces.
indicate moisture resistance (i.e., XXXXR), diffusible
QW-404.21 For filler metal additions, any change from hydrogen (i.e., XXXX H16, H8, etc.), and supplemental
the nominal specified analysis of the filler metal qualified. toughness testing (i.e., XXXX-1 or EXXXXM), are specified
on the WPS, only filler metals which conform to the clas-
QW-404.22 The omission or addition of consumable
sification with the optional supplemental designator(s)
inserts. Qualification in a single-welded butt joint, with or
specified on the WPS shall be used.
without consumable inserts, qualifies for fillet welds and
single-welded butt joints with backing or double-welded QW-404.34 A change in flux type (i.e., neutral to active
butt joints. Consumable inserts that conform to SFA-5.30, or vice versa) for multilayer deposits in P-No. 1 materials.
except that the chemical analysis of the insert conforms to
QW-404.35 A change in the flux-wire classification or a
an analysis for any bare wire given in any SFA specification
change in either the electrode or flux trade name when the
or AWS Classification, shall be considered as having the
flux-wire combination is not classified to an SFA specifi-
same F-Number as that bare wire as given in
cation. Requalification is not required when a flux-wire
Table QW-432.
combination conforms to an SFA specification and the
QW-404.23 A change from one of the following filler change in classification is
metal product forms to another: (a) from one diffusible hydrogen level to another (e.g., a
(a) bare (solid or metal cored) change from F7A2-EA1-A1-H4 to F7A2-EA1-A1-H16), or
(b) flux cored

88
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

(b) to a larger number in the indicator for toughness, cally sealed containers and storage in heated ovens,
indicating classification at a lower toughness testing controlled distribution time, high-temperature baking
temperature (e.g., a change from F7A2-EM12K to prior to use).
F7A4-EM12K)
QW-404.52 An increase in the diffusible hydrogen
This variable does not apply when the weld metal is
designator (e.g., from E7018-H8 to E7018-H16) or to
exempt from toughness testing by other Sections. This
no diffusible hydrogen designator.
exemption does not apply to hard-facing and corro-
sion-resistant overlays. QW-404.53 The addition or deletion of filler metal and,
when used, a change in the filler metal nominal composi-
QW-404.36 When flux from recrushed slag is used,
tion.
each batch or blend, as defined in SFA-5.01, shall be
tested in accordance with Section II, Part C by either QW-404.55 An increase in the thickness or width of
the manufacturer or the user. preplaced filler metal.
QW-404.37 A change in the composition of the depos- QW-404.56 A change to another type or grade of
ited weld metal from one A-Number in Table QW-442 to preplaced filler metal (type or grade are materials of
any other A-Number, or to an analysis not listed in the the same nominal chemical analysis and mechanical prop-
table. A change in the UNS number for each AWS classi- erty range, even though of different product form).
fication of A-No. 8 or A-No. 9 analysis of Table QW-442, or
QW-404.57 An increase in the nominal thickness or
each nonferrous alloy in Table QW-432, shall require sepa-
width of the electrode for strip filler metals used with
rate WPS qualification. A-Numbers may be determined in
the SAW and ESW processes for corrosion-resistant
accordance with QW-404.5.
and hard-facing weld metal overlay.
QW-404.38 A change in the nominal electrode
QW-404.58 The addition or deletion of preplaced filler
diameter used for the first layer of deposit.
metal.
QW-404.39 For submerged-arc welding and electro-
QW-404.59 If filler metal is added, a change in the A-
slag welding, a change in the nominal composition or type
Number of the weld deposit or a change in the nominal
of flux used. Requalification is not required for a change in
composition of the deposited weld metal when an A-
flux particle size.
Number is not assigned.
QW-404.41 A change of more than 10% in the
powdered metal feed rate recorded on the PQR. QW-405 POSITIONS
QW-404.42 A change of more than 5% in the particle QW-405.1 The addition of other welding positions
size range of the powder. than those already qualified. see QW-120, QW-130,
QW-203, and QW-303.
QW-404.43 A change in the powdered metal particle
size range recorded on the PQR. QW-405.3 A change from upward to downward, or
from downward to upward, in the progression specified
QW-404.44 A change from a homogeneous powdered for any pass of a vertical weld, except that the cover or
metal to a mechanical mixed powdered metal or vice wash pass may be up or down. The root pass may also be
versa. run either up or down when the root pass is removed to
QW-404.46 A change in the powder feed rate range sound weld metal in the preparation for welding the
qualified. second side.
QW-404.47 A change of more than 10% in the filler QW-405.4 Except as specified below, the addition of
metal size and/or powder metal particle size. other welding positions than already qualified.
(a) Qualification in the horizontal, vertical, or overhead
QW-404.48 A change of more than 10% in the powder position shall also qualify for the flat position. Qualifica-
metal density. tion in the horizontal fixed position, 5G, shall qualify for
QW-404.49 A change of more than 10% in the filler the flat, vertical, and overhead positions. Qualification in
metal or powder metal feed rate. the horizontal, vertical, and overhead positions shall
qualify for all positions. Qualification in the inclined
QW-404.50 The addition or deletion of flux to the face fixed position, 6G, shall qualify for all positions.
of a weld joint for the purpose of affecting weld penetra- (b) An organization who does production welding in a
tion. particular orientation may make the tests for procedure
QW-404.51 The method of control of moisture pickup qualification in this particular orientation. Such qualifica-
during storage and distribution for SMAW and GMAW-FC tions are valid only for the positions actually tested, except
electrodes and flux for SAW (e.g., purchasing in hermeti- that an angular deviation of ±15 deg is permitted in the

89
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

inclination of the weld axis and the rotation of the weld QW-406.12 An increase in the interpass temperature ð23Þ
face as defined in Figure QW-461.1. A test specimen shall of a high heat input/high interpass temperature bracketed
be taken from the test coupon in each special orientation. qualification or a decrease of more than 50°F (28°C) in the
(c) For hard-facing and corrosion-resistant weld metal interpass temperature of a low heat input/low interpass
overlay, qualification in the 3G, 5G, or 6G positions, where temperature bracketed qualification. This variable does
5G or 6G pipe coupons include at least one vertical not apply when a WPS is qualified with a PWHT above
segment completed utilizing the up-hill progression or the upper transformation temperature.
a 3G plate coupon is completed utilizing the up-hill
progression, shall qualify for all positions. Chemical QW-407 POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT
analysis, hardness, macro-etch, and at least two of the QW-407.1 A separate procedure qualification is
bend tests, as required in Table QW-453, shall be required for each of the following:
removed from the vertical uphill overlaid segment as (a) For P-Numbers 1 through 6 and 9 through 15F
shown in Figure QW-462.5(b). materials, the following postweld heat treatment condi-
(d) A change from the vertical down to vertical up-hill tions apply:
progression shall require requalification. (1) no PWHT
(2) PWHT below the lower transformation tempera-
QW-406 PREHEAT
ture
QW-406.1 A decrease of more than 100°F (55°C) in the (3) PWHT above the upper transformation tempera-
preheat temperature qualified. The minimum tempera- ture (e.g., normalizing)
ture for welding shall be specified in the WPS. (4) PWHT above the upper transformation tempera-
ture followed by heat treatment below the lower trans-
QW-406.2 A change in the maintenance or reduction of
formation temperature (e.g., normalizing or quenching
preheat upon completion of welding prior to any required
followed by tempering)
postweld heat treatment.
(5) PWHT between the upper and lower transforma-
QW-406.3 An increase of more than 100°F (55°C) in tion temperatures
the maximum interpass temperature recorded on the (b) For all other materials, the following postweld heat
PQR. This variable does not apply for any of the following treatment conditions apply:
conditions: (1) no PWHT
(a) WPS is qualified with a heat treatment above the (2) PWHT within a specified temperature range
upper transformation temperature.
QW-407.2 A change in the postweld heat treatment
(b) WPS is for welding austenitic or P-10H material and
(see QW-407.1) temperature and time range
is qualified with a solution heat treatment.
The procedure qualification test shall be subjected to
(c) Base metals are assigned to P-No. 8, P-Nos. 21
PWHT essentially equivalent to that encountered in the
through 26, and P-Nos. 41 through 49.
fabrication of production welds, including at least 80%
QW-406.4 A decrease of more than 100°F (55°C) in the of the aggregate times at temperature(s). The PWHT
preheat temperature qualified or an increase in the total time(s) at temperature(s) may be applied in one
maximum interpass temperature recorded on the PQR. heating cycle. This variable does not apply to a WPS qual-
The minimum temperature for welding shall be specifed ified for welding base metals that are assigned to P-No. 8,
in the WPS. P-Nos. 21 through 26, and P-Nos. 41 through 49.
QW-406.5 A change in the maintenance or reduction of QW-407.6 A change in postweld heat treatment condi-
preheat upon completion of spraying and prior to fusing. tion in QW-407.1 or an increase of 25% or more in total
time at postweld heat treating temperature.
QW-406.7 A change of more than 10% in the amplitude
or number of preheating cycles from that qualified, or if QW-407.7 A change in the heat treatment temperature
other preheating methods are employed, a change in the range qualified if heat treatment is applied after fusing.
preheating temperature of more than 25°F (15°C).
QW-407.8 A separate PQR is required for each of the
QW-406.9 A decrease in the preheat temperature from following:
that achieved on the test coupon and recorded on the PQR. (a) no PWHT
(b) a change of more than 10% in the number of PWHT
QW-406.10 The minimum preheating soaking time
heating current cycles following the welding cycle
prior to the start of welding.
(c) PWHT within a specified temperature and time
QW-406.11 The addition or deletion of a postweld range if heat treatment is performed separately from
hydrogen bakeout. When specified, the minimum the welding operation
soaking temperature and time shall be specified.

90
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-407.9 A separate procedure qualification is welded butt joint or a fillet weld. This exception does
required for each of the following: not apply to P-No. 51 through P-No. 53, P-No. 61
(a) For weld corrosion-resistant overlay of A-No. 8 on through P-No. 62, and P-No. 10I metals.
all base materials, a change in postweld heat treatment
QW-408.9 For groove welds in P-No. 41 through P-No.
condition in QW-407.1, or when the total time at postweld
49 and all welds of P-No. 10I, P-No. 10J, P-No. 10K, P-No. 51
heat treatment encountered in fabrication exceeds 20 hr,
through P-No. 53, and P-No. 61 through P-No. 62 metals,
an increase of 25% or more in total time at postweld heat
the deletion of backing gas or a change in the nominal
treating temperature.
composition of the backing gas from an inert gas to a
(b) For weld corrosion-resistant overlay of A-No. 9 on
mixture including non-inert gas(es).
all base materials, a change in postweld heat treatment
condition in QW-407.1, or an increase of 25% or more QW-408.10 For P-No. 10I, P-No. 10J, P-No. 10K, P-No.
in total time at postweld heat treating temperature. 51 through P-No. 53, and P-No. 61 through P-No. 62
(c) For all other weld corrosion-resistant overlays on metals, the deletion of trailing gas, or a change in the
all base materials, a change in postweld heat treatment nominal composition of the trailing gas from an inert
condition in QW-407.1. gas to a mixture including non-inert gas(es), or a decrease
of 10% or more in the trailing gas flow rate.
QW-407.10 The addition or deletion of PWHT, or a
change of ±45°F (±25°C) in PWHT temperature or an QW-408.11 The addition or deletion of one or more of
increase in the holding time by more than 25% or the following:
change in the method of cooling (e.g., furnace, air, quench). (a) shielding gas
(b) trailing gas
QW-408 GAS (c) backing gas
QW-408.1 The addition or deletion of trailing gas and/ (d) plasma-removing gas
or a change in its composition. QW-408.12 A decrease of more than 10% in the flow
ð23Þ QW-408.2 A separate procedure qualification is rate of one or more of the following: shielding gas, trailing
required for each of the following: gas, backing gas, and plasma-removing gas.
(a) the addition or omission of shielding gas. QW-408.14 A change in the oxygen or fuel gas pressure
(b) a change in shielding gas composition, with the beyond the range qualified.
following exception: Electrodes classified to SFA-5.18,
SFA-5.20, SFA-5.28, or SFA-5.29 that include an oxygen QW-408.16 A change of more than 5% in the flow rate
equivalent shielding gas range designator (e.g., “OE of the plasma-arc gas or powdered metal feed gas
50/4” in the ER70S-6 OE 50/4 electrode classification) recorded on the PQR.
do not require a separate qualification when the shielding QW-408.17 A change in the plasma-arc gas, shielding
gas oxygen equivalent is within the range listed in the clas- gas, or powdered metal feed gas from a single gas to any
sification of that electrode. The shielding gas oxygen other single gas, or to a mixture of gases, or vice versa.
equivalent shall be calculated as follows:
QW-408.18 A change of more than 10% in the gas
oxygen equivalent = % oxygen + (0.5 × % carbon dioxide) mixture composition of the plasma-arc gas, shielding
gas, or powdered metal feed gas recorded on the PQR.
The gas designation of SFA-5.32 may be used to specify
the shielding gas composition. QW-408.19 A change in the nominal composition of the
powder feed gas or (plasma-arc spray) plasma gas qual-
QW-408.3 A change in the specified flow rate range of ified.
the shielding gas or mixture of gases.
QW-408.20 A change of more than 5% in the plasma
QW-408.4 A change in the composition of the orifice or gas flow rate range qualified.
shielding gas.
QW-408.21 A change in the flow rate of the orifice or
QW-408.5 The addition or deletion of backing gas, a shielding gas.
change in backing gas composition, or a change in the
specified flow rate range of the backing gas. QW-408.22 A change in the shielding gas type, gas
pressure, or purging time.
QW-408.6 A change of environment shielding such as
from vacuum to an inert gas, or vice versa. QW-408.23 For titanium, zirconium, and their alloys,
the deletion of one or more of the following:
QW-408.7 A change in the type of fuel gas. (a) shielding gas
QW-408.8 The omission of backing gas except that re- (b) trailing gas
qualification is not required when welding a single- (c) backing gas
welded butt joint with a backing strip or a double-

91
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-408.24 For gas-shielded processes, the maximum (2) WPS is for welding austenitic or P-10H material
moisture content (dew point) of the shielding gas. and is qualified with a solution heat treatment.
Moisture control may be by specification of shielding (3) Base metals are assigned to P-No. 8, P-Nos. 21
gas classifications in SFA-5.32. through 26, and P-Nos. 41 through 49.
QW-408.25 A change in the furnace atmosphere from QW-409.2 A change from globular, spray or pulsed
that qualified. spray transfer welding to short-circuiting transfer
welding or vice versa.
QW-408.26 For friction stir welding of P-No. 6, P-No. 7,
P-No. 8, P-No. 10H, P-No. 10I, P-No. 41 through P-No. 47, P- QW-409.3 The addition or deletion of pulsing current
No. 51 through P-No. 53, and P-No. 61 through P-No. 62, to dc power source.
the addition or deletion of trailing or tool shielding gas, or
QW-409.4 A change from AC to DC, or vice versa; and in ð23Þ
a change in gas composition or flow rate.
DC welding, a change from electrode negative (straight
QW-409 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS polarity) to electrode positive (reverse polarity), or
vice versa.
ð23Þ QW-409.1 An increase in heat input, or an increase in
volume of weld metal deposited per unit length of weld, for QW-409.5 A change of ±15% in the amperage or
each process recorded on the PQR. For arc welding, the voltage range.
increase shall be determined by (a), (b), or (c) for nonwa- QW-409.6 A change in the beam current of more than
veform controlled welding, or by (b) or (c) for waveform ±5%, voltage of more than ±2%, welding speed of more
controlled welding. See Nonmandatory Appendix H. For than ±2%, beam focus current of more than ±5%, gun-to-
low-power density laser beam welding (LLBW), the work distance of more than ±5%, or a change in oscillation
increase shall be determined by (d). length or width of more than ±20%.
(a) Heat Input
QW-409.7 Any change in the beam pulsing frequency
voltage × amperage × 60 duration.
Heat input [J/in. (J/mm)] =
travel speed [in./min (mm/min)]
QW-409.8 A change in the range of amperage, or
(b) Volume. Volume of weld metal measured by except for SMAW, GTAW, or waveform controlled
(1) an increase in bead size (width × thickness), or welding, a change in the range of voltage. A change in
(2) a decrease in length of weld bead per unit length the range of electrode wire feed speed may be used as
of electrode an alternative to amperage. See Nonmandatory
(c) Heat Input Determined Using Instantaneous Energy Appendix H.
or Power QW-409.9 A change in the arc timing of more than ±1∕10
(1) For instantaneous energy measurements in sec.
joules (J)
QW-409.10 A change in amperage of more than ±10%.
energy (J )
Heat input [J/in. (J/mm)] = QW-409.11 A change in the power source from one
weld bead length [in. (mm)]
model to another.
(2) For instantaneous power measurements in QW-409.12 A change in type or size of tungsten elec-
joules per second (J/s) or watts (W) trode.
power ( J/s or W) × arc time (s)
Heat input [J/in. (J/mm)] = QW-409.13 A change from one Resistance Welding
weld bead length [in.(mm)] Manufacturer’s Association (RWMA) electrode class to
another. In addition, a change in the following:
(d) LLBW Heat Input (a) for spot and projection welding, a change in the
LLBW heat input [J/in. (J/mm)] nominal shape or more than 10% of the contact area
of the welding electrode
power (W) × 60
= (b) for seam welding, a change of thickness, profile,
travel speed [in./min (mm/min)] orientation, or diameter of electrodes exceeding 10%
where Power is the power delivered to the work surface as QW-409.14 Addition or deletion of upslope or down-
measured by calorimeter or other suitable methods. slope current control, or a change of more than 10% in the
This variable does not apply for any of the following slope current time or amplitude.
conditions:
(1) WPS is qualified with a heat treatment above the QW-409.15
upper transformation temperature. (a) A change of more than 5% in any of the following:
(1) preheating current

92
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

(2) preheating current amplitude Nonmandatory Appendix H). For LLBW, the increase
(3) preheating current time duration shall be determined by (d).
(4) electrode pressure (a) Heat Input
(5) welding current
(6) welding current time duration Heat Input J/in.2
( )(J/mm2)
(b) A change from AC to DC or vice versa. Voltage × Amperage × 60
(c) The addition or deletion of pulsing current to a DC =
Travel Speed [in./min (mm/min)] × Bead Width [in. (mm)]
power source.
(d) When using pulsing DC current, a change of more (b) Volume. Volume of weld metal is measured by one of
than 5% in the pulse amplitude, frequency, or number of the following:
pulses per cycle. (1) bead size (thickness times width measured
(e) A change of more than 5% in the post-heating transverse to the axis of the weld)
current time duration. (2) length of weld bead per unit length of electrode
QW-409.17 A change in the power supply primary (c) Heat Input Determined Using Instantaneous Energy
voltage or frequency, or in the transformer turns ratio, or Power
tap setting, choke position, secondary open circuit (1) For instantaneous energy measurements in
voltage or phase control setting. joules (J)

QW-409.18 A change in the procedure or frequency of Heat Input J/in.2

( )(J/mm2)
tip cleaning. Energy (J)
=
QW-409.19 Any change of more than ±10% in the Weld Bead Length [in. (mm)] × Bead Width [in. (mm)]
beam pulsing frequency and pulse duration.
(2) For instantaneous power measurements in
QW-409.20 For LBW and LLBW, a change in the
joules per second (J/s) or Watts (W)
following variables: mode of operation (from pulsed to
continuous and vice versa), energy distribution across Heat Input J/in.2
( )(J/mm2)
the beam (i.e., multimode or Gaussian). For LBW, a
change of more than ±10% in the spatial profile [e.g., Power (J/s or W) × arc time (s)
=
M2 (beam quality factor) or uniformity] of the focused Weld Bead Length [in. (mm)] × Bead Width [in. (mm)]
or unfocused beam.
(d) LLBW Heat Input
QW-409.21 For LBW, a decrease of more than 5% in
the power delivered to the work surface as measured by LLBW Heat Input J/in.2
( )(J/mm2)
calorimeter or other suitable methods. For LLBW and
Power (W ) × 60
special process LBW, a decrease of more than 10% in =
the power delivered to the work surface as measured Travel Speed (in./min)(mm/min) × Bead Width [in. (mm)]
by calorimeter or other suitable methods.
where Power is the power delivered to the work surface as
QW-409.22 An increase of more than 10% in the measured by a calorimeter or other suitable methods.
amperage used in application for the first layer. When using strip filler metal, the strip width shall be
considered as the bead width. This variable does not apply
QW-409.23 A change of more than 10% in the ranges of
for base metals assigned to P-Nos. 8, 21 through 26, and 41
amperage or voltage.
through 49.
QW-409.24 A change of more than 10% in the filler
QW-409.27 A change in the flashing time of more than
wire wattage recorded on the PQR. Wattage is a function
10%.
of current voltage, and stickout dimension.
QW-409.28 A change in the upset current time by more
QW-409.25 A change of more than 10% in the plasma-
than 10%.
arc current or voltage recorded on the PQR.
ð23Þ QW-409.26 For the first layer only, an increase in heat QW-409.29
input of more than 10% or an increase in volume of (a) A change in heat input beyond the following (see
weld metal deposited per unit length of weld of more Figure QW-462.12):
than 10%. (1) An increase or decrease in the ratio of heat input
For arc welding, the heat input shall be determined by between the first tempering bead layer and the weld beads
(a), (b), or (c) for nonwaveform controlled welding or by deposited against the base metal of more than 20% for P-
(b) or (c) for waveform controlled welding (see No. 1 and P-No. 3 metals and 10% for all other P-Number
metals.

93
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

(2) An increase or decrease in the ratio of heat input QW-410 TECHNIQUE

between the second tempering bead layer and the first
tempering bead layer of more than 20% for P-No. 1 QW-410.1 For manual or semiautomatic welding, a
and P-No. 3 metals and 10% for all other P-Number metals. change from the stringer bead technique to the weave
(3) The ratio of heat input between subsequent bead technique, or vice versa.
layers shall be maintained until a minimum of 3∕16 in. QW-410.2 A change in the nature of the flame,
(5 mm) of weld metal has been deposited over the oxidizing to reducing, or vice versa.
base metal.
(4) Where the basis for acceptance is toughness QW-410.3 A change in the orifice, cup, or nozzle size.
testing and the filler metal is exempt from temper QW-410.4 A change in the welding technique, fore-
bead qualification, the heat input may not exceed 50% hand to backhand, or vice versa.
above the heat input qualified for the remaining fill passes.
(5) Where the basis for acceptance is hardness QW-410.5 A change in the method of initial and inter-
testing, a decrease of more than 20% in heat input for pass cleaning (brushing, grinding, etc.).
the remainder of the fill passes. QW-410.6 A change in the method of back gouging.
(b) Heat input shall be determined using the following
methods: QW-410.7 For the machine or automatic welding
(1) For machine or automatic GTAW or PAW, an process, a change in width, frequency, or dwell time of
increase or decrease of 10% in the power ratio measured oscillation technique.
as: QW-410.8 A change in the contact tube to work
distance.
amperage × voltage
power ratio = ÄÅ É QW-410.9 A change from multiple passes per side to ð23Þ
ÅÅ WFS TS × A ÑÑÑ
(
ÅÅÇ ) f ÑÑÖ single pass per side.
QW-410.10 A change from single electrode to multiple
where electrode, or vice versa, for machine or automatic welding
only. This variable does not apply when a WPS is qualified
Af = cross-section area of the filler metal wire with a PWHT above the upper transformation tempera-
TS = welding travel speed ture or when an austenitic or P-No. 10H material is solu-
WFS = filler metal wire feed speed tion annealed after welding.
(2) For processes other than machine or automatic QW-410.11 A change from closed chamber to out-of-
GTAW or PAW, heat input shall be determined by the chamber conventional torch welding in P-No. 51 through
method of QW-409.1. P-No. 53 metals, but not vice versa.
(3) If manual GTAW or PAW is used for making in-
process repairs in accordance with QW-290.5, a record of QW-410.14 For LBW, a change of more than ±5 deg in
bead size shall be made. the relative angle between the axis of the beam and the
workpiece. For EBW, a change of more than ±10 deg in the
ð23Þ QW-409.30 A change from AC to DC, or vice versa; and relative angle between the axis of the beam and the work-
in DC welding, a change from electrode negative (straight piece.
polarity) to electrode positive (reverse polarity), or vice
versa. This variable does not apply to a WPS qualified for QW-410.15 A change in the spacing of multiple elec-
welding base metals that are assigned to P-Nos. 8, 21 trodes for machine or automatic welding.
through 26, and 41 through 49. QW-410.17 A change in the type or model of the
ð23Þ QW-409.31 A heat input below that qualified in a low welding equipment.
heat input/low interpass temperature bracketed qualifi- QW-410.18 An increase in the absolute pressure of the
cation or a heat input above that qualified in a high heat vacuum welding environment beyond that qualified.
input/high interpass temperature bracketed qualifica-
tion. Heat input shall be calculated using the equations QW-410.19 Any change in filament type, size, or shape.
in QW-409.1. QW-410.20 The addition of a wash pass.
ð23Þ QW-409.32 At least one of the following transfer QW-410.21 For full penetration groove welds, a change
modes shall be specified: of welding from both sides to welding from one side only,
(a) short-circuiting but not vice versa.
(b) globular
(c) spray QW-410.22 A change in either of the following stud
(d) pulsed-spray welding parameters: a change of stud gun model; a
change in the lift more than ±1∕32 in. (0.8 mm).

94
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-410.25 A change from manual or semiautomatic to QW-410.45 A change in the method of surface prepara-
machine or automatic welding and vice versa. tion of the base metal to be hard-faced (example: sand-
blasting versus chemical cleaning).
QW-410.26 The addition or deletion of peening.
QW-410.46 A change in the spray-torch model or tip
QW-410.27 A change in the rotational speed producing
orifice size.
a change in the outside surface velocity [ ft/min (m/min)]
greater than ±10% of the outside surface velocity quali- QW-410.47 A change of more than 10% in the fusing
fied. temperature range qualified. A change in the rate of
cooling from the fusing temperature of more than
QW-410.28 A change in the thrust load greater than
50°F/hr (28°C/h), a change in the fusing method (e.g.,
±10% of the thrust load qualified.
torch, furnace, induction).
QW-410.29 A change in the rotational energy greater
QW-410.48 A change in the constricted arc from trans-
than ±10% of the rotational energy qualified.
ferable to nontransferable or vice versa.
QW-410.30 Any change in upset dimension (overall
QW-410.49 A change in the diameter of the plasma
loss in length of parts being joined) greater than ±10%
torch-arc constricting orifice.
of the upset qualified.
QW-410.50 A change in the number of electrodes
QW-410.31 A change in the method of preparing the
acting on the same welding puddle.
base metal prior to welding (e.g., changing from mechan-
ical cleaning to chemical cleaning or to abrasive cleaning, QW-410.52 A change in the method of delivering the
or vice versa). filler metal to the molten pool, such as from the leading or
trailing edge of the torch, the sides of the torch, or through
QW-410.32 A change of more than 10% in the holding
the torch.
(forging) pressure prior to or after welding. A change of
more than 10% in the electrode holding time (electrode QW-410.53 A change of more than 20% in the center-
duration sequence). to-center weld bead distance.
QW-410.33 A change from one welding type to QW-410.54 A change in the upset length or force of
another, or modification of equipment, including Manu- more than 10%.
facturer, control panel, model number, electrical rating
QW-410.55 A change in the distance between the
or capacity, type of electrical energy source, or method
clamping dies of more than 10% or a change in the
of applying pressure.
surface preparation of the clamping area.
QW-410.34 Addition or deletion of an electrode
QW-410.56 A change in the clamping force by more
cooling medium and where it is used.
than 10%.
QW-410.35 A change in the distance between arms or a
QW-410.57 A change in more than 10% of the forward
change in the throat depth.
or reverse speed.
QW-410.37 A change from single to multiple pass or
QW-410.58 The deletion of surface temper beads (see
vice versa.
Figure QW-462.12) or a change from surface temper beads
ð23Þ QW-410.38 A change from multiple layer to single that cover the weld surface to beads that are only depos-
layer or vice versa. ited along the toes of the weld.
QW-410.39 A change in the torch type or tip size. QW-410.59 A change from machine or automatic
welding to manual or semiautomatic welding.
QW-410.40 For submerged-arc welding and electro-
slag welding, the deletion of a supplementary device QW-410.60 The addition of thermal methods to
for controlling the magnetic field acting on the weld prepare the surface to be welded unless the WPS requires
puddle. that the metal be ground to bright metal before welding.
QW-410.41 A change of more than 15% in the travel QW-410.61 The distance, S, from the toe of the weld to
speed range recorded on the PQR. the edge of any tempering bead shall be limited to the
distance measured on the test coupon ± 1 ∕ 1 6 in.
QW-410.43 For the torch or workpiece, a change of
(±1.5 mm) (see Figure QW-462.12). Alternatively, a
more than 10% in the travel speed range qualified.
range for S may be established by locating temper
QW-410.44 A change of more than 15% in the spray- beads at various distances from the toe of the weld
torch to workpiece distance qualified. followed by hardness traverses or toughness testing,
as applicable. Temper reinforcing beads shall not be
permitted to touch the toe of the weld. In addition, the

95
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

ratios of heat input described in QW-409.29 shall apply to QW-410.74 A change in the welding control method
temper beads. from that qualified (e.g., force control method to position
control method, or vice versa, in the plunge direction; and
QW-410.62 The method of removal of surface temper
force control method to travel control method, or vice
bead reinforcing layer when it will be removed, including
versa, in the travel direction).
provisions to prevent overheating of the weld surface.
QW-410.75 A change in the rotating tool
QW-410.63 For weld beads against the base metal and
(a) type or design from the qualified “family” to another
for each tempering bead layer, the range of bead width, b,
(i.e., threaded pin, smooth pin, fluted, self-reacting,
relative to overlap of the previous bead width, a, as shown
retracting-pin, or other tool types)
in Figure QW-462.13, shall be specified on the WPS.
(b) configuration or dimensions from that qualified
Overlap between 25% and 75% does not require quali-
beyond the following limits (as applicable):
fication.
(1) shoulder diameter greater than 10%
(a) Overlap greater than 75% shall be qualified by
(2) shoulder scroll pitch greater than 10%
welding a test coupon using the desired overlap. The
(3) shoulder profile (e.g., addition or deletion of
overlap qualified shall be the maximum overlap permitted
shoulder feature)
and the minimum overlap shall be 50%.
(4) pin diameter greater than 5%
(b) Overlap less than 25% shall be qualified by welding
(5) pin length greater than the lesser of 5% of qual-
a test coupon using the desired overlap. The overlap qual-
ified pin length or 1% of base metal thickness (not
ified shall be the minimum overlap permitted and the
minimum pin length for retracting-pin tools, and not ap-
maximum overlap shall be 50%.
plicable for self-reacting rotating tools)
QW-410.64 For vessels or parts of vessels constructed (6) pin taper angle greater than 5 deg
with P-No. 11A and P-No. 11B base metals, weld grooves (7) flute pitch greater than 5%
for thicknesses less than 5∕8 in. (16 mm) shall be prepared (8) pin tip geometry or shape
by thermal processes when such processes are to be (9) thread pitch greater than 10% (as applicable)
employed during fabrication. This groove preparation (10) flat design resulting in a change of the total flat
shall also include back gouging, back grooving, or surface area greater than 20%
removal of unsound weld metal by thermal processes (11) number of flats
when these processes are to be employed during fabrica- (12) cooling characteristics of the rotating pin (e.g.,
tion. change from water-cooled to air-cooled, and vice versa)
(c) pin material specification, nominal chemical
QW-410.65 The addition or deletion of grinding
composition, and minimum hardness
beyond that required to clean the surface or remove
minor surface flaws (i.e., use or nonuse of half-bead tech- QW-410.76 A change in the rotating tool operation
nique or similar technique). from that qualified beyond the following limits (as appli-
cable):
QW-410.66 A change of more than ±10% in the travel
(a) decrease in rotation speed, or increase greater than
speed, the ratio of the beam diameter to focal length, or the
10%
lens to work distance.
(b) direction of rotation
QW-410.67 A change in the optical technique used to (c) plunge force greater than 10% or plunge position
focus the welding energy from that qualified. set point greater than 5% when controlling the plunge
direction (except during ramp-up and ramp-down
QW-410.68 A change in welding equipment type (e.g.,
when starting and stopping)
YAG, TAG, etc.).
(d) angular tilt greater than 1 deg in any direction
QW-410.70 A change in the method of preparing the (e) travel force or travel speed greater than 10% when
base metal surface prior to insertion into the furnace. controlling travel direction (except during ramp-up and
ramp-down when starting and stopping)
QW-410.71 A decrease in the percentage of block
(f) range of relative motion between tool components
compression (original stack height compared to height
when using self-reacting or retractable-pin tools
after welding) from that of the test coupon.
(g) reduction in the smallest radius of travel path
QW-410.72 A decrease in the welding temperature or curvature that results in reversing the travel direction
time from that used on the procedure qualification test of the pin or the shoulder
coupon. (h) manner or angle of intersection, or number of coin-
cident intersections, within the same weld or between the
QW-410.73 A change in joint restraint fixtures from
weld and the HAZ of other welds
that qualified (e.g., fixed anvil to self-reacting, and vice
versa) or from single-sided to two-sided welding, and QW-410.77 A change in the laser wavelength (e.g., CO2,
vice versa. Nd:YAG, fiber, disk, diode) from that qualified.

96
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-410.80 A change of ±5% in the diameter of the QW-410.87 A change from multiple passes per side to a ð23Þ
focused spot size. single pass per side. This variable does not apply to any of
the following conditions:
QW-410.81 The addition of tube expansion prior to
(a) The WPS is qualified with a heat treatment above
welding.
the upper transformation temperature.
QW-410.82 A change in the method of pressure appli- (b) The WPS is for welding austenitic or P-10H material
cation. and is qualified with a solution heat treatment.
(c) The base metals are assigned to P-Nos. 8, 21 through
QW-410.83 A change in the type of explosive or a
26, and 41 through 49.
change in the energy content greater than ±10%.
QW-410.88 A change from keyhole LBW to LLBW, and ð23Þ
QW-410.84 A change in the distance between the
vice versa.
explosive charge and the tubesheet face greater than
±10%. QW-410.89 An addition or deletion of torch-controlled ð23Þ
oscillation.
QW-410.85 A change in the specified clearance
between the tube and the tubesheet greater than ±10%. QW-410.90 A change from pulsed mode of operation to ð23Þ
continuous mode of operation, and vice versa.
QW-410.86 For the machine or automatic welding
process, a change of more than ±10% in width, frequency,
or dwell time of oscillation technique.

97
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-416
ð23Þ Welding Variables Welder Performance
Essential
GMAW
OFW SMAW SAW [Note (2)] GTAW PAW LBW
Table Table Table Table Table Table Table
Paragraph [Note (1)] Brief of Variables QW-352 QW-353 QW-354 QW-355 QW-356 QW-357 QW-358
QW-402 .4 − Backing X X X X X
Joints .7 + Backing X
QW-403 .2 Maximum qualified X
Base Metal .16 ϕ Pipe diameter X X X X X X
.18 ϕ P-Number X X X X X X X
QW-404 .14 ± Filler X X X X
Filler Metals .15 ϕ F-Number X X X X X X X
.22 ± Inserts X X X
.23 ϕ Filler metal product X X X
form
.30 ϕ t Weld deposit X X X X X X
.31 ϕ t Weld deposit X
.32 t Limit (s. cir. arc) X
QW-405 .1 + Position X X X X X X X
Positions .3 ϕ ↑↓ Vert. welding X X X X X
QW-408 .7 ϕ Type fuel gas X
Gas .8 − Backing gas X X X X
QW-409 .2 ϕ Transfer mode X
Electrical .4 ϕ Current or polarity X
QW-410 .68 ϕ Type of equipment X
Technique .88 ϕ Technique X
.89 ± Oscillation X
.90 ϕ Mode of operation X
Welding Processes:

OFW = Oxyfuel gas welding

SMAW = Shielded metal-arc welding
SAW = Submerged-arc welding
GMAW = Gas metal-arc welding
GTAW = Gas tungsten-arc welding
PAW = Plasma-arc welding
LBW = Laser beam welding

Legend:
ϕ Change t Thickness
+ Addition ↑ Uphill
− Deletion ↓ Downhill

NOTES:
(1) For description, see Article IV.
(2) Flux-cored arc welding as shown in Table QW-355, with or without additional shielding from an externally supplied gas or gas mixture, is
included.

98
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-420 P-NUMBERS found in ISO/TR 20173, Grouping systems for materials —

American materials. While this listing is provided as a
QW-421 P-NUMBERS AND GROUP NUMBERS convenience to users worldwide, it is provided for infor-
mation only. Section IX does not refer to this grouping as a
(a) P-Numbers. P-Numbers (P-No.) are assigned to base basis for establishing the range of base metals qualified for
metals for the purpose of reducing the number of welding either procedure or performance qualification.
and brazing procedure qualifications required. (c) In 2009, S-Numbers were removed from
P-Numbers are alphanumeric designations; accord- Table QW/QB-422. S-Numbers were assigned to materials
ingly, each P-Number designation shall be considered a that were acceptable for use by the ASME B31 Code for
separate P-Number (e.g., base metals assigned P-No. Pressure Piping, or by selected Boiler and Pressure Vessel
5A are considered a separate P-Number from those Code Cases, but which were not included within ASME
assigned P-No. 5B or P-No. 5C). Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Material Specifications
(b) Group Numbers. Ferrous base metals have been (Section II). Base metals previously assigned S-
assigned Group Numbers creating subsets of P- Numbers were reassigned the corresponding P-
Numbers that are used when WPSs are required to be Numbers or P-Numbers plus Group Numbers.
qualified by toughness testing by other Sections or Codes.
QW-421.4 Reassignments of P-Numbers and Group ð23Þ
ð23Þ QW-421.1 Assignments of P-Numbers and Group
Numbers. There are instances where materials assigned
Numbers.
to one P- or S-Number or Group Number have been reas-
(a) P-Number and Group Number assignments are signed to a different P- or S-Number or Group Number in
listed in Table QW/QB-422. If an unlisted base metal later editions. Procedure and performance qualifications
has the same UNS number designation as a base metal that were qualified under the previous P-, S-, or BM-
listed in Table QW/QB-422, that base metal is also Numbers or Group Number assignment may continue
assigned that P-Number or P-Number plus Group Number. to be used under the new P-Number or Group Number
These assignments are based essentially on comparable assignment [see QW-200.2(c) or QB‐200.2(c)], provided
base metal characteristics, such as composition, weld- the WPS or BPS is revised to limit the materials qualified
ability, brazeability, and mechanical properties, where for welding or brazing to those assigned to the new P-
this can logically be done. These assignments do not Number(s) or Group Number(s) for the specific mate-
imply that base metals may be indiscriminately substi- rial(s) originally used for the procedure qualification
tuted for a base metal that was used in the qualification test coupon. Other materials from the original P-, S-, or
test without consideration of compatibility from the BM-Number or Group Number must be reassigned to
standpoint of metallurgical properties, postweld heat the same P-Number or Group Number to be considered
treatment, design, mechanical properties, and service re- qualified for welding or brazing under the revised WPS or
quirements. BPS.
P-number assignments listed at https://pnumbers.org Table QW/QB-421.2
but not included in Table QW/QB-422 may also be used. Base Metal Assignment Groups
Table QW/QB-421.2 shows the assignment groups for Base Metal Welding Brazing
various alloy systems.
Steel and steel P-No. 1 through P-No. 101 through
(b) Material specifications that have been adopted by alloys P-No. 15F P-No. 103
ASME for use in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Aluminum and P-No. 21 through P-No. 104 and
are provided the prefix SA, SB, or SFA, and P-Numbers are aluminum- P-No. 26 P-No. 105
assigned per Table QW/QB-422 base alloys
Material produced to the source material specification Copper and P-No. 31 through P-No. 107 and
is unassigned unless separately classified in copper-base P-No. 35 P-No. 108
Table QW/QB-422. alloys
Nickel and nickel- P-No. 41 through P-No. 110 through
ð23Þ QW-421.3 Other Groupings. Table QW/QB-422 base alloys P-No. 49 P-No. 112
contains other groupings. Titanium and P-No. 51 through P-No. 115
(a) In 2023, brazing P‐Numbers were replaced by AWS titanium-base P-No. 53
Base Metal Numbers (BM No.) by adoption of the brazing alloys
base metal classification of AWS B2.2/B2.2M, Specification Zirconium and P-No. 61 and P-No. 117
for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification. zirconium-base P-No. 62
(b) The column “ISO/TR 15608 Group” in Table alloys
QW/QB-422 is a listing of the assignments of materials
in accordance with the grouping criteria of ISO/TR
15608, Welding — Guidelines for a metallic materials
grouping system, and it is consistent with the assignments

99
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-421.5 Acceptance Tensile Values.

(a) Base Metals Listed in Table QW/QB-422. The column
“Minimum Specified Tensile” in Table QW/QB-422 lists
the acceptance values for the tensile tests of the
welding or brazing procedure qualification, except as
otherwise allowed in QW-153 or QB-153.
Base metals listed with minimum specified tensile
values may be used for procedure qualification.
Base metals listed without a minimum specified tensile
value shall not be used for the purpose of groove weld
procedure qualification.
(b) Base Metals Not Listed in Table QW/QB-422. If an
unlisted base metal having the same UNS number of a
listed base metal is used for procedure qualification,
the minimum tensile value of the listed base metal
shall apply for the tension test specimens.
For unassigned unlisted base metals, the minimum
tensile strength definition requirements of QW-424.1
apply.

100
 Table QW/QB-422
Base Metal P-Numbers ð23Þ

Minimum Welding
Designation, Specified Nominal Thickness
Type, Tensile, P‐ Group ISO 15608 Brazing Typical Limits,
Spec. No. or Grade UNS No. ksi (MPa) No. No. Group P-No. Nominal Composition Product Form in. (mm)
Ferrous

A or SA–36 … … 58 (400) 1 1 11.1 100 C–Mn–Si Plate, bar & shapes …

A or SA–53 E, A K02504 48 (330) 1 1 1.1 100 C Resistance welded pipe …
A or SA–53 S, A K02504 48 (330) 1 1 1.1 100 C Smls. pipe …
A or SA–53 E, B K03005 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C–Mn Resistance welded pipe …
A or SA–53 F K03005 48 (330) 1 1 11.1 100 C Furnace welded pipe …
A or SA–53 S, B K03005 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C–Mn Smls. pipe …

A or SA–105 … K03504 70 (485) 1 2 11.1 100 C Flanges & fittings …

A or SA–106 A K02501 48 (330) 1 1 1.1 100 C–Si Smls. pipe …

ASME BPVC.IX-2023
A or SA–106 B K03006 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C–Mn–Si Smls. pipe …
A or SA–106 C K03501 70 (485) 1 2 11.1 100 C–Mn–Si Smls. pipe …
101

A108 1015 G10150 … 1 1 1.1 100 C Bar …

A108 1018 G10180 … 1 1 1.1 100 C Bar …
A108 1020 G10200 … 1 1 1.1 100 C Bar …
A108 8620 G86200 … 3 3 4.1 100 0.5Ni–0.5Cr–Mo Bar …

A or SA–134 SA283 A K01400 45 (310) 1 1 1.1 100 C Welded pipe …

A or SA–134 SA285 A K01700 45 (310) 1 1 1.1 100 C Welded pipe …
A or SA–134 SA283 B K01702 50 (345) 1 1 1.1 100 C Welded pipe …
A or SA–134 SA285 B K02200 50 (345) 1 1 1.1 100 C Welded pipe …
A or SA–134 SA283 C K02401 55 (380) 1 1 1.1 100 C Welded pipe …
A or SA–134 SA283 D K02702 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C Welded pipe …
A or SA–134 SA285 C K02801 55 (380) 1 1 11.1 100 C Welded pipe …

A or SA–135 A K02509 48 (330) 1 1 1.1 100 C E.R.W. pipe …

A or SA–135 B K03018 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C E.R.W. pipe …

A139 A K02508 48 (330) 1 1 1.1 100 C Welded pipe …

A139 B K03003 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C Welded pipe …
A139 C K03004 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C Welded pipe …
A139 D K03010 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C Welded pipe …
 Table QW/QB-422
Base Metal P-Numbers (Cont’d)
Minimum Welding
Designation, Specified Nominal Thickness
Type, Tensile, P‐ Group ISO 15608 Brazing Typical Limits,
Spec. No. or Grade UNS No. ksi (MPa) No. No. Group P-No. Nominal Composition Product Form in. (mm)
Ferrous (Cont’d)
A139 E K03012 66 (455) 1 1 11.1 100 C Welded pipe …

A167 302B S30215 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni–2Si Plate, sheet & strip …
A167 308 S30800 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 20Cr–10Ni Plate, sheet & strip …
A167 309 S30900 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 23Cr–12Ni Plate, sheet & strip …
A167 310 S31000 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni Plate, sheet & strip …

A or SA–178 A K01200 47 (325) 1 1 1.1 100 C E.R.W. tube …

A or SA–178 D K02709 70 (485) 1 2 11.1 100 C–Mn–Si E.R.W. tube …
A or SA–178 C K03503 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C E.R.W. tube …

ASME BPVC.IX-2023
A or SA–179 … K01200 47 (325) 1 1 1.1 100 C Smls. tube …

A or SA–181 Cl. 60 K03502 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C–Si Pipe flange & fittings …
102

A or SA–181 Cl. 70 K03502 70 (485) 1 2 11.1 100 C–Si Pipe flange & fittings …

A or SA–182 F12, Cl. 1 K11562 60 (415) 4 1 5.1 110 1Cr–0.5Mo Forgings …

A or SA–182 F12, Cl. 2 K11564 70 (485) 4 1 5.1 110 1Cr–0.5Mo Forgings …
A or SA–182 F11, Cl. 2 K11572 70 (485) 4 1 5.1 110 1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si Forgings …
A or SA–182 F11, Cl. 3 K11572 75 (515) 4 1 5.1 110 1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si Forgings …
A or SA–182 F11, Cl. 1 K11597 60 (415) 4 1 5.1 110 1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si Forgings …
A or SA–182 F2 K12122 70 (485) 3 2 4.2 100 0.5Cr–0.5Mo Forgings …
A or SA–182 F1 K12822 70 (485) 3 2 1.1 100 C–0.5Mo Forgings …
A or SA–182 F22, Cl. 1 K21590 60 (415) 5A 1 5.2 110 2.25Cr–1Mo Forgings …
A or SA–182 F22, Cl. 3 K21590 75 (515) 5A 1 5.2 110 2.25Cr–1Mo Forgings …
A or SA–182 FR K22035 63 (435) 9A 1 9.1 100 2Ni–1Cu Forgings …
A or SA–182 F3VCb K31390 85 (585) 5C 1 6.2 110 3Cr–1Mo–0.25V–Cb–Ca Forgings …
A or SA–182 F21 K31545 75 (515) 5A 1 5.2 110 3Cr–1Mo Forgings …
A or SA–182 F3V K31830 85 (585) 5C 1 6.2 120 3Cr–1Mo–V–Ti–B Forgings …
A or SA–182 F22V K31835 85 (585) 5C 1 6.2 110 2.25Cr–1Mo–V Forgings …
A or SA–182 F5 K41545 70 (485) 5B 1 5.3 110 5Cr–0.5Mo Forgings …
A or SA–182 F5a K42544 90 (620) 5B 1 5.3 110 5Cr–0.5Mo Forgings …
A or SA–182 F91 K90901 90 (620) 15E 1 6.4 110 9Cr–1Mo–V Forgings …
A or SA–182 F9 K90941 85 (585) 5B 1 5.4 110 9Cr–1Mo Forgings …
 Table QW/QB-422
Base Metal P-Numbers (Cont’d)
Minimum Welding
Designation, Specified Nominal Thickness
Type, Tensile, P‐ Group ISO 15608 Brazing Typical Limits,
Spec. No. or Grade UNS No. ksi (MPa) No. No. Group P-No. Nominal Composition Product Form in. (mm)
Ferrous (Cont’d)

A or SA–216 WCA J02502 60 (415) 1 1 1.1 100 C–Si Castings …

A or SA–216 WCC J02503 70 (485) 1 2 1.1 100 C–Mn–Si Castings …
A or SA–216 WCB J03002 70 (485) 1 2 1.1 100 C–Si Castings …

A or SA–217 WC6 J12072 70 (485) 4 1 5.1 110 1.25Cr–0.5Mo Castings …

A or SA–217 WC4 J12082 70 (485) 4 1 9.1 100 1Ni–0.5Cr–0.5Mo Castings …
A or SA–217 WC1 J12524 65 (450) 3 1 1.1 100 C–0.5Mo Castings …
A or SA–217 WC9 J21890 70 (485) 5A 1 5.2 110 2.25Cr–1Mo Castings …
A or SA–217 WC5 J22000 70 (485) 4 1 4.2 100 0.75Ni–1Mo–0.75Cr Castings …
A or SA–217 C5 J42045 90 (620) 5B 1 5.3 110 5Cr–0.5Mo Castings …

ASME BPVC.IX-2023
A or SA–217 C12 J82090 90 (620) 5B 1 5.4 110 9Cr–1Mo Castings …
A or SA–217 C12A J84090 85 (585) 15E 1 6.4 110 9Cr–1Mo–V Castings …
108

A or SA–217 CA15 J91150 90 (620) 6 3 7.2 150 13Cr Castings …

A or SA–225 D K12004 75 (515) 10A 1 2.1 100 Mn–0.5Ni–V Plate >3 (75)
A or SA–225 D K12004 80 (550) 10A 1 2.1 100 Mn–0.5Ni–V Plate ≤3 (75)
A or SA–225 C K12524 105 (725) 10A 1 4.1 100 Mn–0.5Ni–V Plate …

A or SA–234 WP11, Cl. 1 … 60 (415) 4 1 5.1 110 1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si Piping fittings …

A or SA–234 WP11, Cl. 3 … 75 (515) 4 1 5.1 110 1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si Piping fittings …
A or SA–234 WPB K03006 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C–Mn–Si Piping fittings …
A or SA–234 WPC K03501 70 (485) 1 2 11.1 100 C–Mn–Si Piping fittings …
A or SA–234 WP12, Cl. 1 K12062 60 (415) 4 1 5.1 110 1Cr–0.5Mo Piping fittings …
A or SA–234 WP12, Cl. 2 K12062 70 (485) 4 1 5.1 110 1Cr–0.5Mo Piping fittings …
A or SA–234 WP1 K12821 55 (380) 3 1 11.2 100 C–0.5Mo Piping fittings …
A or SA–234 WP22, Cl. 1 K21590 60 (415) 5A 1 5.2 110 2.25Cr–1Mo Piping fittings …
A or SA–234 WP22, Cl. 3 K21590 75 (515) 5A 1 5.2 110 2.25Cr–1Mo Piping fittings …
A or SA–234 WPR K22035 63 (435) 9A 1 9.1 100 2Ni–1Cu Piping fittings …
A or SA–234 WP5, Cl. 1 K41545 60 (415) 5B 1 5.3 110 5Cr–0.5Mo Piping fittings …
A or SA–234 WP5, Cl. 3 K41545 75 (515) 5B 1 5.3 110 5Cr–0.5Mo Piping fittings …
A or SA–234 WP91 K90901 85 (585) 15E 1 6.4 110 9Cr–1Mo–V Piping fittings …
A or SA–234 WP9, Cl. 1 K90941 60 (415) 5B 1 5.4 110 9Cr–1Mo Piping fittings …
 Table QW/QB-422
Base Metal P-Numbers (Cont’d)
Minimum Welding
Designation, Specified Nominal Thickness
Type, Tensile, P‐ Group ISO 15608 Brazing Typical Limits,
Spec. No. or Grade UNS No. ksi (MPa) No. No. Group P-No. Nominal Composition Product Form in. (mm)
Ferrous (Cont’d)
A or SA–234 WP9, Cl. 3 K90941 75 (515) 5B 1 5.4 110 9Cr–1Mo Piping fittings …
A or SA–234 WP92 K92460 90 (620) 15E 1 6.4 110 9Cr–2W Piping fittings …

A or SA–240 … N08367 95 (655) 45 … 8.2 420 46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–N Plate ≥0.187 (5)

A or SA–240 … N08367 100 (690) 45 … 8.2 420 46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–N Sheet & strip <0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 904L N08904 71 (490) 45 … 8.2 420 44Fe–25Ni–21Cr–Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 201–1 S20100 75 (515) 8 3 8.3 130 17Cr–4Ni–6Mn Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 201–2 S20100 95 (655) 8 3 8.3 130 17Cr–4Ni–6Mn Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 201LN S20153 95 (655) 8 3 8.3 130 16Cr–4Ni–6Mn Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 202 S20200 90 (620) 8 3 8.3 130 18Cr–5Ni–9Mn Plate, sheet & strip …

ASME BPVC.IX-2023
A or SA–240 … S20400 95 (655) 8 3 8.3 130 16Cr–9Mn–2Ni–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 XM–19 S20910 100 (690) 8 3 8.3 130 22Cr–13Ni–5Mn Plate ≥0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 XM–19 S20910 105 (725) 8 3 8.3 130 22Cr–13Ni–5Mn Sheet & strip <0.187 (5)
109

A or SA–240 XM–17 S21600 90 (620) 8 3 8.3 130 19Cr–8Mn–6Ni–Mo–N Plate ≥0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 XM–17 S21600 100 (690) 8 3 8.3 130 19Cr–8Mn–6Ni–Mo–N Sheet & strip <0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 XM–18 S21603 90 (620) 8 3 8.3 130 19Cr–8Mn–6Ni–Mo–N Plate ≥0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 XM–18 S21603 100 (690) 8 3 8.3 130 19Cr–8Mn–6Ni–Mo–N Sheet & strip <0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 S21800 S21800 95 (655) 8 3 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni–8Mn–4Si–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 XM–29 S24000 100 (690) 8 3 8.3 130 18Cr–3Ni–12Mn Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 301 S30100 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 17Cr–7Ni Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 302 S30200 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 304 S30400 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 304L S30403 70 (485) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 304H S30409 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 304N S30451 80 (550) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 XM–21 S30452 85 (585) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni–N Plate ≥0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 XM–21 S30452 90 (620) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni–N Sheet & strip <0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 304LN S30453 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 305 S30500 70 (485) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–11Ni Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S30600 S30600 78 (540) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–15Ni–4Si Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S30601 S30601 78 (540) 8 1 8.1 130 17.5Cr–17.5Ni–5.3Si Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S30815 S30815 87 (600) 8 2 8.2 130 21Cr–11Ni–N Plate, sheet & strip …
 Table QW/QB-422
Base Metal P-Numbers (Cont’d)
Minimum Welding
Designation, Specified Nominal Thickness
Type, Tensile, P‐ Group ISO 15608 Brazing Typical Limits,
Spec. No. or Grade UNS No. ksi (MPa) No. No. Group P-No. Nominal Composition Product Form in. (mm)
Ferrous (Cont’d)
A or SA–240 309S S30908 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 23Cr–12Ni Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 309H S30909 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 23Cr–12Ni Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 309Cb S30940 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 23Cr–12Ni–Cb Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 309HCb S30941 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 23Cr–12Ni–Cb Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 310S S31008 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 310H S31009 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 310Cb S31040 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni–Cb Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 310HCb S31041 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni–Cb Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 310MoLN S31050 78 (540) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N Plate >0.25 (6)
A or SA–240 310MoLN S31050 84 (580) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N Sheet & strip ≤0.25 (6)

ASME BPVC.IX-2023
A or SA–240 S31200 S31200 100 (690) 10H 1 10.2 145 25Cr–6Ni–Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S31254 S31254 95 (655) 8 4 8.2 130 20Cr–18Ni–6Mo Plate ≥0.187 (5)
110

A or SA–240 S31254 S31254 100 (690) 8 4 8.2 130 20Cr–18Ni–6Mo Sheet & strip <0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 S31260 S31260 100 (690) 10H 1 10.2 145 25Cr–6.5Ni–3Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 … S31266 109 (750) 45 … 8.2 420 24Cr–22Ni–6Mo–3Mn– Plate, sheet & strip …
Cu–W–N
A or SA–240 S31277 S31277 112 (770) 45 … 8.2 420 27Ni–22Cr–7Mo–Mn–Cu Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 316 S31600 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 316L S31603 70 (485) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 316H S31609 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 316Ti S31635 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–Ti Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 316Cb S31640 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–Cb Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 316N S31651 80 (550) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 316LN S31653 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 … S31655 92 (635) 8 3 8.2 130 20.5Cr–8.8Ni–Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 317 S31700 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–13Ni–3Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 317L S31703 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–13Ni–3Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S31725 S31725 75 (515) 8 4 8.1 130 19Cr–15Ni–4Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S31726 S31726 80 (550) 8 4 8.1 130 19Cr–15.5Ni–4Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S31753 S31753 80 (550) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–13Ni–3Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S31803 S31803 90 (620) 10H 1 10.1 145 22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 … S32003 90 (620) 10H 1 10.3 145 21Cr–3.5Ni–Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
 Table QW/QB-422
Base Metal P-Numbers (Cont’d)
Minimum Welding
Designation, Specified Nominal Thickness
Type, Tensile, P‐ Group ISO 15608 Brazing Typical Limits,
Spec. No. or Grade UNS No. ksi (MPa) No. No. Group P-No. Nominal Composition Product Form in. (mm)
Ferrous (Cont’d)
A or SA–240 … S32053 93 (640) 8 4 8.2 130 23Cr–25Ni–5.5Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 321 S32100 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 140 18Cr–10Ni–Ti Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 … S32101 94 (650) 10H 1 10.3 145 21Cr–5Mn–1.5Ni–Cu–N Plate >0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 … S32101 101 (700) 10H 1 10.3 145 21Cr–5Mn–1.5Ni–Cu–N Sheet & strip ≤0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 321H S32109 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 140 18Cr–10Ni–Ti Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 … S32202 94 (650) 10H 1 10.3 145 22Cr–2Ni–Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 2205 S32205 95 (655) 10H 1 10.1 145 22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 … S32304 87 (600) 10H 1 10.1 145 23Cr–4Ni–Mo–Cu–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 … S32506 90 (620) 10H 1 10.2 145 25Cr–6Ni–Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S32550 S32550 110 (760) 10H 1 10.2 145 25Cr–5Ni–3Mo–2Cu Plate, sheet & strip …

ASME BPVC.IX-2023
A or SA–240 S32615 S32615 80 (550) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–20Ni–5.5Si Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 … S32654 109 (750) 8 4 8.2 130 24Cr–22Ni–7Mo–3Mn Plate, sheet & strip …
111

A or SA–240 S32750 S32750 116 (800) 10H 1 10.2 145 25Cr–7Ni–4Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S32760 S32760 108 (745) 10H 1 10.2 145 25Cr–8Ni–3Mo–W–Cu–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 329 S32900 90 (620) 10H 1 10.2 145 26Cr–4Ni–Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S32906 S32906 109 (750) 10H 1 10.2 145 29Cr–6.5Ni–2Mo–N Plate ≥0.40 (10)
A or SA–240 S32906 S32906 116 (800) 10H 1 10.2 145 29Cr–6.5Ni–2Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip <0.40 (10)
A or SA–240 S32950 S32950 100 (690) 10H 1 10.2 145 26Cr–4Ni–Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S34565 S34565 115 (795) 8 4 8.3 130 24Cr–17Ni–6Mn–4.5Mo– Plate, sheet & strip …
N
A or SA–240 347 S34700 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–10Ni–Cb Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 347H S34709 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–10Ni–Cb Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 348 S34800 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–10Ni–Cb Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 348H S34809 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–10Ni–Cb Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 XM–15 S38100 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–18Ni–2Si Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 … S38815 78 (540) 8 1 8.1 130 14Cr–16Ni–6Si–Cu–Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 405 S40500 60 (415) 7 1 7.1 160 12Cr–Al Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 409 S40910 55 (380) 7 1 7.1 150 11Cr–Ti Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 409 S40920 55 (380) 7 1 7.1 150 11Cr–Ti Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 409 S40930 55 (380) 7 1 7.1 150 11Cr–Ti Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 410 S41000 65 (450) 6 1 7.2 150 13Cr Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 410S S41008 60 (415) 7 1 7.2 150 13Cr Plate, sheet & strip …
 Table QW/QB-422
Base Metal P-Numbers (Cont’d)
Minimum Welding
Designation, Specified Nominal Thickness
Type, Tensile, P‐ Group ISO 15608 Brazing Typical Limits,
Spec. No. or Grade UNS No. ksi (MPa) No. No. Group P-No. Nominal Composition Product Form in. (mm)
Ferrous (Cont’d)
A or SA–240 S41500 S41500 115 (795) 6 4 7.2 150 13Cr–4.5Ni–Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 429 S42900 65 (450) 6 2 7.2 150 15Cr Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 430 S43000 65 (450) 7 2 7.1 150 17Cr Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 439 S43035 60 (415) 7 2 7.1 150 18Cr–Ti Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S43932 S43932 60 (415) 7 2 7.1 150 18Cr–Ti–Cb Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S43940 S43940 62 (425) 7 2 7.1 150 18Cr–Ti–Cb Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 … S44100 60 (415) 7 2 7.1 150 18Cr–Cb–Ti Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S44400 S44400 60 (415) 7 2 7.1 150 18Cr–2Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 XM–33 S44626 68 (470) 10I 1 7.1 150 27Cr–1Mo–Ti Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 XM–27 S44627 65 (450) 10I 1 7.1 150 27Cr–1Mo Plate, sheet & strip …

ASME BPVC.IX-2023
A or SA–240 S44635 S44635 90 (620) 10I 1 7.1 150 25Cr–4Ni–4Mo–Ti Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S44660 S44660 85 (585) 10K 1 7.1 150 26Cr–3Ni–3Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
112

A or SA–240 S44700 S44700 80 (550) 10J 1 7.1 150 29Cr–4Mo Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 S44800 S44800 80 (550) 10K 1 7.1 150 29Cr–4Mo–2Ni Plate, sheet & strip …
A or SA–240 … S82012 94 (650) 10H 1 10.3 145 20Cr–1Ni–Mo–N Plate >0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 … S82012 102 (705) 10H 1 10.3 145 20Cr–1Ni–Mo–N Sheet & strip ≤0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 … S82031 94 (650) 10H 1 10.3 145 21Cr–3Ni–1Mo–N Plate >0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 … S82031 102 (705) 10H 1 10.3 145 21Cr–3Ni–1Mo–N Sheet & strip ≤0.187 (5)
A or SA–240 … S82441 99 (680) 10H 1 10.1 145 24Cr–4Ni–3Mn–1.5Mo–N Plate ≥0.40 (10)
A or SA–240 … S82441 107 (740) 10H 1 10.1 145 24Cr–4Ni–3Mn–1.5Mo–N Plate, sheet & strip <0.40 (10)

A or SA–249 … N08367 95 (655) 45 … 8.2 420 46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–N Welded tube >0.187 (5)
A or SA–249 … N08367 100 (690) 45 … 8.2 420 46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–N Welded tube ≤0.187 (5)
A or SA–249 … N08904 71 (490) 45 … 8.2 420 44Fe–25Ni–21Cr–Mo Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP 201 S20100 95 (655) 8 3 8.3 130 17Cr–4Ni–6Mn Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP 202 S20200 90 (620) 8 3 8.3 130 18Cr–5Ni–9Mn Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP XM–19 S20910 100 (690) 8 3 8.3 130 22Cr–13Ni–5Mn Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP XM–29 S24000 100 (690) 8 3 8.3 130 18Cr–3Ni–12Mn Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP304 S30400 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP304L S30403 70 (485) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP304H S30409 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP304N S30451 80 (550) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni–N Welded tube …
 Table QW/QB-422
Base Metal P-Numbers (Cont’d)
Minimum Welding
Designation, Specified Nominal Thickness
Type, Tensile, P‐ Group ISO 15608 Brazing Typical Limits,
Spec. No. or Grade UNS No. ksi (MPa) No. No. Group P-No. Nominal Composition Product Form in. (mm)
Ferrous (Cont’d)
A or SA–249 TP304LN S30453 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni–N Welded tube …
A or SA–249 S30815 S30815 87 (600) 8 2 8.2 130 21Cr–11Ni–N Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP309S S30908 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 23Cr–12Ni Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP309H S30909 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 23Cr–12Ni Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP309Cb S30940 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 23Cr–12Ni–Cb Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP309HCb S30941 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 23Cr–12Ni–Cb Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP310S S31008 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP310H S31009 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP310Cb S31040 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni–Cb Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP310HCb S31041 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni–Cb Welded tube …

ASME BPVC.IX-2023
A or SA–249 TP310MoLN S31050 78 (540) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N Welded tube >0.25 (6)
A or SA–249 TP310MoLN S31050 84 (580) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N Welded tube ≤0.25 (6)
113

A or SA–249 S31254 S31254 95 (655) 8 4 8.2 130 20Cr–18Ni–6Mo Welded tube >0.187 (5)
A or SA–249 S31254 S31254 98 (675) 8 4 8.2 130 20Cr–18Ni–6Mo Welded tube ≤0.187 (5)
A or SA–249 TP316 S31600 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP316L S31603 70 (485) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP316H S31609 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP316N S31651 80 (550) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP316LN S31653 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N Welded tube …
A or SA–249 … S31655 92 (635) 8 3 8.2 130 20.5Cr–8.8Ni–Mo–N Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP317 S31700 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–13Ni–3Mo Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP317L S31703 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–13Ni–3Mo Welded tube …
A or SA–249 S31725 S31725 75 (515) 8 4 8.1 130 19Cr–15Ni–4Mo Welded tube …
A or SA–249 S31726 S31726 80 (550) 8 4 8.1 130 19Cr–15.5Ni–4Mo Welded tube …
A or SA–249 … S32053 93 (640) 8 4 8.2 130 23Cr–25Ni–5.5Mo–N Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP321 S32100 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 140 18Cr–10Ni–Ti Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP321H S32109 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 140 18Cr–10Ni–Ti Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP347 S34700 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–10Ni–Cb Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP347H S34709 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–10Ni–Cb Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP348 S34800 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–10Ni–Cb Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP348H S34809 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–10Ni–Cb Welded tube …
A or SA–249 TP XM–15 S38100 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–18Ni–2Si Welded tube …
 Table QW/QB-422
Base Metal P-Numbers (Cont’d)
Minimum Welding
Designation, Specified Nominal Thickness
Type, Tensile, P‐ Group ISO 15608 Brazing Typical Limits,
Spec. No. or Grade UNS No. ksi (MPa) No. No. Group P-No. Nominal Composition Product Form in. (mm)
Ferrous (Cont’d)
A or SA–249 … S38815 78 (540) 8 1 8.1 130 14Cr–16Ni–6Si–Cu–Mo Welded tube …

A or SA–250 T1b K11422 53 (365) 3 1 1.1 100 C–0.5Mo E.R.W. tube …

A or SA–250 T1 K11522 55 (380) 3 1 1.1 100 C–0.5Mo E.R.W. tube …
A or SA–250 T2 K11547 60 (415) 3 1 4.2 100 0.5Cr–0.5Mo E.R.W. tube …
A or SA–250 T12 K11562 60 (415) 4 1 5.1 110 1Cr–0.5Mo E.R.W. tube …
A or SA–250 T11 K11597 60 (415) 4 1 5.1 110 1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si E.R.W. tube …
A or SA–250 T1a K12023 60 (415) 3 1 1.1 100 C–0.5Mo E.R.W. tube …
A or SA–250 T22 K21590 60 (415) 5A 1 5.2 110 2.25Cr–1Mo E.R.W. tube …

A254 Cl. 1 K01001 42 (290) … … NA 100 C Cu brazed tube …

ASME BPVC.IX-2023
A254 Cl. 2 K01001 42 (290) … … NA 100 C Cu brazed tube …
114

A or SA–266 4 K03017 70 (485) 1 2 11.1 100 C–Mn–Si Forgings …

A or SA–266 1 K03506 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C–Si Forgings …
A or SA–266 2 K03506 70 (485) 1 2 11.1 100 C–Si Forgings …
A or SA–266 3 K05001 75 (515) 1 2 11.2 100 C–Si Forgings …

A or SA–268 TP405 S40500 60 (415) 7 1 7.1 160 12Cr–Al Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 S40800 S40800 55 (380) 7 1 7.1 150 12Cr–Ti Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 TP409 S40900 55 (380) 7 1 7.1 150 11Cr–Ti Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 TP410 S41000 60 (415) 6 1 7.2 150 13Cr Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 S41500 S41500 115 (795) 6 4 7.2 150 13Cr–4.5Ni–Mo Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 TP429 S42900 60 (415) 6 2 7.2 150 15Cr Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 TP430 S43000 60 (415) 7 2 7.1 150 17Cr Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 TP439 S43035 60 (415) 7 2 7.1 150 18Cr–Ti Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 TP430Ti S43036 60 (415) 7 2 7.1 160 18Cr–Ti Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 18Cr–2Mo S44400 60 (415) 7 2 7.1 150 18Cr–2Mo Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 TP446–1 S44600 70 (485) 10I 1 7.1 150 27Cr Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 TP446–2 S44600 65 (450) 10I 1 7.1 150 27Cr Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 TPXM–33 S44626 68 (470) 10I 1 7.1 150 27Cr–1Mo–Ti Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 TPXM–27 S44627 65 (450) 10I 1 7.1 150 27Cr–1Mo Smls. & welded tube …
A or SA–268 25–4–4 S44635 90 (620) 10I 1 7.1 150 25Cr–4Ni–4Mo–Ti Smls. & welded tube …
 Table QW/QB-422
Base Metal P-Numbers (Cont’d)
Minimum Welding
Designation, Specified Nominal Thickness
Type, Tensile, P‐ Group ISO 15608 Brazing Typical Limits,
Spec. No. or Grade UNS No. ksi (MPa) No. No. Group P-No. Nominal Composition Product Form in. (mm)
Ferrous (Cont’d)
A or SA–312 N08367 N08367 95 (655) 45 … 8.2 420 46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–N Smls. & welded pipe > 0.187 (5)
A or SA–312 N08367 N08367 100 (690) 45 … 8.2 420 46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–N Smls. & welded pipe ≤ 0.187 (5)
A or SA–312 … N08904 71 (490) 45 … 8.2 420 44Fe–25Ni–21Cr–Mo Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP201LN S20153 95 (655) 8 3 8.3 130 16Cr–4Ni–6Mn Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TPXM–19 S20910 100 (690) 8 3 8.3 130 22Cr–13Ni–5Mn Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TPXM–11 S21904 90 (620) 8 3 8.3 130 21Cr–6Ni–9Mn Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TPXM–29 S24000 100 (690) 8 3 8.3 130 18Cr–3Ni–12Mn Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP304 S30400 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP304L S30403 70 (485) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP304H S30409 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni Smls. & welded pipe …

ASME BPVC.IX-2023
A or SA–312 TP304N S30451 80 (550) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni–N Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP304LN S30453 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–8Ni–N Smls. & welded pipe …
116

A or SA–312 S30600 S30600 78 (540) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–15Ni–4Si Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 S30815 S30815 87 (600) 8 2 8.2 130 21Cr–11Ni–N Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP309S S30908 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 23Cr–12Ni Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP309H S30909 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 23Cr–12Ni Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP309Cb S30940 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 23Cr–12Ni–Cb Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP309HCb S30941 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 23Cr–12Ni–Cb Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 … S31002 73 (505) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni–N Smls. pipe …
A or SA–312 TP310S S31008 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP310H S31009 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP310Cb S31040 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni–Cb Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP310HCb S31041 75 (515) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–20Ni–Cb Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP310MoLN S31050 78 (540) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N Smls. & welded pipe >0.25 (6)
A or SA–312 TP310MoLN S31050 84 (580) 8 2 8.2 130 25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N Smls. & welded pipe ≤0.25 (6)
A or SA–312 S31254 S31254 95 (655) 8 4 8.2 130 20Cr–18Ni–6Mo Smls. & welded pipe >0.187 (5)
A or SA–312 S31254 S31254 98 (675) 8 4 8.2 130 20Cr–18Ni–6Mo Smls. & welded pipe ≤0.187 (5)
A or SA–312 TP316 S31600 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP316L S31603 70 (485) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP316H S31609 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP316Ti S31635 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–Ti Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP316N S31651 80 (550) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N Smls. & welded pipe …
 Table QW/QB-422
Base Metal P-Numbers (Cont’d)
Minimum Welding
Designation, Specified Nominal Thickness
Type, Tensile, P‐ Group ISO 15608 Brazing Typical Limits,
Spec. No. or Grade UNS No. ksi (MPa) No. No. Group P-No. Nominal Composition Product Form in. (mm)
Ferrous (Cont’d)
A or SA–312 TP316LN S31653 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP317 S31700 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–13Ni–3Mo Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP317L S31703 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–13Ni–3Mo Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 S31725 S31725 75 (515) 8 4 8.1 130 19Cr–15Ni–4Mo Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 S31726 S31726 80 (550) 8 4 8.1 130 19Cr–15.5Ni–4Mo Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 … S32053 93 (640) 8 4 8.2 130 23Cr–25Ni–5.5Mo–N Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP321 S32100 70 (485) 8 1 8.1 140 18Cr–10Ni–Ti Smls. pipe >0.375 (10) NPS
A or SA–312 TP321 S32100 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 140 18Cr–10Ni–Ti Smls. pipe ≤0.375 (10) NPS
A or SA–312 TP321 S32100 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 140 18Cr–10Ni–Ti Welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP321H S32109 70 (485) 8 1 8.1 140 18Cr–10Ni–Ti Smls. pipe >0.375 (10) NPS

ASME BPVC.IX-2023
A or SA–312 TP321H S32109 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 140 18Cr–10Ni–Ti Smls. pipe ≤0.375 (10) NPS
A or SA–312 TP321H S32109 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 140 18Cr–10Ni–Ti Welded pipe …
117

A or SA–312 S32615 S32615 80 (550) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–20Ni–5.5Si Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 S34565 S34565 115 (795) 8 4 8.3 130 24Cr–17Ni–6Mn–4.5Mo– Smls. & welded pipe …
N
A or SA–312 TP347 S34700 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–10Ni–Cb Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP347H S34709 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–10Ni–Cb Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP347LN S34751 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–10Ni–Cb–N Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP348 S34800 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–10Ni–Cb Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TP348H S34809 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–10Ni–Cb Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–312 TPXM–15 S38100 75 (515) 8 1 8.1 130 18Cr–18Ni–2Si Smls. & welded pipe …

A or SA–333 10 … 80 (550) 1 3 11.1 100 C–Mn–Si Smls. & welded pipe …

A or SA–333 6 K03006 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C–Mn–Si Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–333 1 K03008 55 (380) 1 1 11.1 100 C–Mn Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–333 4 K11267 60 (415) 4 2 4.1 120 0.75Cr–0.75Ni–Cu–Al Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–333 7 K21903 65 (450) 9A 1 9.1 100 2.5Ni Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–333 9 K22035 63 (435) 9A 1 9.1 100 2Ni–1Cu Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–333 3 K31918 65 (450) 9B 1 9.2 100 3.5Ni Smls. & welded pipe …
A or SA–333 8 K81340 100 (690) 11A 1 9.3 100 9Ni Smls. & welded pipe …

A or SA–334 6 K03006 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C–Mn–Si Welded tube …

A or SA–334 1 K03008 55 (380) 1 1 11.1 100 C–Mn Welded tube …
 Table QW/QB-422
Base Metal P-Numbers (Cont’d)
Minimum Welding
Designation, Specified Nominal Thickness
Type, Tensile, P‐ Group ISO 15608 Brazing Typical Limits,
Spec. No. or Grade UNS No. ksi (MPa) No. No. Group P-No. Nominal Composition Product Form in. (mm)
Ferrous (Cont’d)
A or SA–508 3V K31830 85 (585) 5C 1 6.2 120 3Cr–1Mo–V–Ti–B Forgings …
A or SA–508 5, Cl. 1 K42365 105 (725) 11A 5 3.1 110 3.5Ni–1.75Cr–0.5Mo–V Forgings …
A or SA–508 5, Cl. 2 K42365 115 (795) 11B 10 3.1 110 3.5Ni–1.75Cr–0.5Mo–V Forgings …

A or SA–513 1008 G10080 42 (290) 1 1 1.1 100 C Tube …

A or SA–513 1010 G10100 45 (310) 1 1 1.1 100 C Tube …
A or SA–513 1015 G10150 48 (330) 1 1 1.1 100 C Tube …

A513 1015 CW G10150 … 1 1 1.1 100 C Tube …

A513 1020 CW G10200 … 1 2 1.1 100 C Tube …
A513 1025 CW G10250 … 1 2 1.2 100 C Tube …

ASME BPVC.IX-2023
A513 1026 CW G10260 … 1 3 11.1 100 C Tube …
130

A514 Q … 100 (690) 11B 9 3.1 100 1.3Ni–1.3Cr–0.5Mo–V Plate >2.5 (65) ≤6 (150)
A514 Q … 110 (760) 11B 9 3.1 100 1.3Ni–1.3Cr–0.5Mo–V Plate ≤2.5 (65)
A514 F K11576 110 (760) 11B 3 3.1 100 0.75Ni–0.5Cr–0.5Mo–V Plate ≤2.5 (65)
A514 B K11630 110 (760) 11B 4 3.1 100 0.5Cr–0.2Mo–V Plate ≤1.25 (32)
A514 A K11856 110 (760) 11B 1 3.1 100 0.5Cr–0.25Mo–Si Plate ≤1.25 (32)
A514 E K21604 100 (690) 11B 2 3.1 110 1.75Cr–0.5Mo–Cu Plate >2.5 (65) ≤6 (150)
A514 E K21604 110 (760) 11B 2 3.1 110 1.75Cr–0.5Mo–Cu Plate ≤2.5 (65)
A514 P K21650 100 (690) 11B 8 3.1 110 1.25Ni–1Cr–0.5Mo Plate >2.5 (65) ≤6 (150)
A514 P K21650 110 (760) 11B 8 3.1 110 1.25Ni–1Cr–0.5Mo Plate ≤2.5 (65)

A or SA–515 60 … 60 (415) 1 1 11.1 100 C–Si Plate >1 (25)

A or SA–515 60 K02401 60 (415) 1 1 1.1 100 C Plate ≤1 (25)
A or SA–515 65 K02800 65 (450) 1 1 11.1 100 C–Si Plate …
A or SA–515 70 K03101 70 (485) 1 2 11.1 100 C–Si Plate …

A or SA–516 55 K01800 55 (380) 1 1 1.1 100 C–Si Plate …

A or SA–516 60 K02100 60 (415) 1 1 1.1 100 C–Mn–Si Plate …
A or SA–516 65 K02403 65 (450) 1 1 1.1 100 C–Mn–Si Plate …
A or SA–516 70 K02700 70 (485) 1 2 11.1 100 C–Mn–Si Plate …

A or SA–517 F K11576 115 (795) 11B 3 3.1 100 0.75Ni–0.5Cr–0.5Mo–V Plate ≤2.5 (65)
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-423 ALTERNATE BASE MATERIALS FOR

Base Metal(s) Used for
WELDER QUALIFICATION Procedure Qualification
QW-423.1 Base metal used for welder qualification Coupon Base Metals Qualified
may be substituted for the base metal specified in the One metal from a P-Number to Any metals assigned that
any metal from the same P-Number
WPS in accordance with the following table. Any base
P-Number
metal shown in the same row may be substituted in
One metal from a P-Number to Any metal assigned the first
the performance qualification test coupon for the base any metal from any other P-Number to any metal
metal(s) specified in the WPS followed during welder P-Number assigned the second
qualification. When a base metal shown in the left P-Number
column of the table is used for welder qualification, One metal from P-No. 15E to any Any P-No. 15E or 5B metal to
the welder is qualified to weld all combinations of metal from P-No. 15E any metal assigned P-No. 15E
base metals shown in the right column, including unas- or 5B
signed metals of similar chemical composition to these One metal from P-No. 15E to any Any P-No. 15E or 5B metal to
metals. metal from any other any metal assigned the
P-Number second P-Number
Base Metal(s) Used for One metal from P-No. 3 to any Any P-No. 3 metal to any metal
Performance Qualification Base Metals Qualified metal from P-No. 3 assigned P-No. 3 or 1
P-No. 1 through P-No. 15F, P-No. 1 through P-No. 15F, One metal from P-No. 4 to any Any P-No. 4 metal to any metal
P-No. 34, or P-No. 41 P-No. 34, and P-No. 41 through metal from P-No. 4 assigned P-No. 4, 3, or 1
through P-No. 49 P-No. 49 One metal from P-No. 5A to any Any P-No. 5A metal to any metal
P-No. 21 through P-No. 26 P-No. 21 through P-No. 26 metal from P-No. 5A assigned P-No. 5A, 4, 3, or 1
P-No. 51 through P-No. 53 or P-No. 51 through P-No. 53 and One metal from P-No. 5A to a Any P-No. 5A metal to any metal
P-No. 61 or P-No. 62 P-No. 61 and P-No. 62 metal from P-No. 4, or P-No. 3, assigned to P-No. 4, 3, or 1
or P-No. 1
Any unassigned metal to the The unassigned metal to itself
same unassigned metal One metal from P-No. 4 to a Any P-No. 4 metal to any metal
metal from P-No. 3 or P-No. 1 assigned to P-No. 3 or 1
Any unassigned metal to any The unassigned metal to any metal
P-Number metal assigned to the same P-Number as Any unassigned metal to the The unassigned metal to itself
the qualified metal same unassigned metal
Any unassigned metal to any The first unassigned metal to the Any unassigned metal to any The unassigned metal to any
other unassigned metal second unassigned metal P-Number metal metal assigned to the same
P-Number as the qualified
metal
QW-423.2 A base metal used for welder qualification Any unassigned metal to any The unassigned metal to any
conforming to national or international standards or metal from P-No. 15E metal assigned P-No. 15E or
specifications may be considered as having the same 5B
P-Number as an assigned metal provided it meets the Any unassigned metal to any The first unassigned metal to
other unassigned metal the second unassigned metal
mechanical and chemical requirements of the assigned
metal. The base metal specification and corresponding
P-Number shall be recorded on the qualification record. QW-424.2 For welds joining base metals to weld metal
buildup or corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay, the
QW-424 BASE METALS USED FOR PROCEDURE buildup or overlay portion of the joint may be substituted
QUALIFICATION in the test coupon by any P-Number base material that
QW-424.1 Base metals are assigned P-Numbers in nominally matches the chemical analysis of the buildup
Table QW/QB-422 ; metals that do not appear in Table or overlay.
QW/QB-422 are considered to be unassigned metals QW-424.3 Base metals (e.g., additively manufactured ð23Þ
except as otherwise defined for base metals having the products or components) produced by welding using filler
same UNS numbers. Unassigned metals shall be identified metal meeting the requirements of a welding consumable
in the WPS and on the PQR by specification, type, and classification listed in Table QW/QB-422 are assigned the
grade, or by chemical analysis and mechanical properties. P-number and Group number shown in that table.
The minimum tensile strength shall be defined by the
organization that specified the unassigned metal if the
tensile strength of that metal is not defined by the material
specification.

190
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-430 F-NUMBERS tions, where this can logically be done. The grouping does
not imply that base metals or filler metals within a group
QW-431 GENERAL may be indiscriminately substituted for a metal that was
used in the qualification test without consideration of the
The following F-Number grouping of electrodes and
compatibility of the base and filler metals from the stand-
welding rods in Table QW-432 is based essentially on
point of metallurgical properties, postweld heat treatment
their usability characteristics, which fundamentally deter-
design and service requirements, and mechanical proper-
mine the ability of welders to make satisfactory welds with
ties.
a given filler metal. This grouping is made to reduce the
number of welding procedure and performance qualifica-

Table QW-432
F-Numbers
Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification
F-No. ASME Specification AWS Classification UNS No.
Steel and Steel Alloys
1 SFA-5.1 EXX20 ...
1 SFA-5.1 EXX22 ...
1 SFA-5.1 EXX24 ...
1 SFA-5.1 EXX27 ...
1 SFA-5.1 EXX28 ...

1 SFA-5.4 EXXX(X)-26 ...

1 SFA-5.5 EXX20-X ...
1 SFA-5.5 EXX27-X ...

2 SFA-5.1 EXX12 ...

2 SFA-5.1 EXX13 ...
2 SFA-5.1 EXX14 ...
2 SFA-5.1 EXX19 ...
2 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX13-X ...

3 SFA-5.1 EXX10 ...

3 SFA-5.1 EXX11 ...
3 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX10-X ...
3 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX11-X ...

4 SFA-5.1 EXX15 ...

4 SFA-5.1 EXX16 ...
4 SFA-5.1 EXX18 ...
4 SFA-5.1 EXX18M ...
4 SFA-5.1 EXX48 ...

SFA-5.4 other than austenitic and

4 EXXX(X)-15 ...
duplex
SFA-5.4 other than austenitic and
4 EXXX(X)-16 ...
duplex
SFA-5.4 other than austenitic and
4 EXXX(X)-17 ...
duplex
4 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX15-X ...
4 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX16-X ...

4 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX18-X ...

4 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX18M ...
4 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX18M1 ...

191
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-432
F-Numbers
Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification (Cont’d)
F-No. ASME Specification AWS Classification UNS No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont’d)
4 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX45 ...

5 SFA-5.4 austenitic and duplex EXXX(X)-15 ...

5 SFA-5.4 austenitic and duplex EXXX(X)-16 ...
5 SFA-5.4 austenitic and duplex EXXX(X)-17 ...

6 SFA-5.2 All classifications ...

6 SFA-5.9 All classifications ...
6 SFA-5.17 All classifications ...
6 SFA-5.18 All classifications ...
6 SFA-5.20 All classifications ...

6 SFA-5.22 All classifications ...

6 SFA-5.23 All classifications ...
6 SFA-5.25 All classifications ...
6 SFA-5.26 All classifications ...
6 SFA-5.28 All classifications ...

6 SFA-5.29 All classifications ...

6 SFA-5.30 INMs-X ...
6 SFA-5.30 IN5XX ...
6 SFA-5.30 IN3XX(X) ...
6 SFA-5.39 All classifications …
Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys
21 SFA-5.3 E1100 A91100
21 SFA-5.3 E3003 A93003
21 SFA-5.10 ER1070 A91070
21 SFA-5.10 ER1080A A91080
21 SFA-5.10 ER1100 A91100
21 SFA-5.10 ER1188 A91188
21 SFA-5.10 ER1200 A91200
21 SFA-5.10 ER1450 A91450
21 SFA-5.10 ER3103 A93103
21 SFA-5.10 R1070 A91070
21 SFA-5.10 R1080A A91080
21 SFA-5.10 R1100 A91100
21 SFA-5.10 R1188 A91188
21 SFA-5.10 R1200 A91200
21 SFA-5.10 R1450 A91450
21 SFA-5.10 R3103 A93103

22 SFA-5.10 ER5087 A95087

22 SFA-5.10 ER5183 A95183
22 SFA-5.10 ER5183A A95183
22 SFA-5.10 ER5187 A95187
22 SFA-5.10 ER5249 A95249

22 SFA-5.10 ER5356 A95356

22 SFA-5.10 ER5356A A95356

192
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-432
F-Numbers
Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification (Cont’d)
F-No. ASME Specification AWS Classification UNS No.
Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys (Cont’d)
22 SFA-5.10 ER5554 A95554
22 SFA-5.10 ER5556 A95556

22 SFA-5.10 ER5556A A95556

22 SFA-5.10 ER5556B A95556

22 SFA-5.10 ER5556C A95556

22 SFA-5.10 ER5654 A95654
22 SFA-5.10 ER5654A A95654

22 SFA-5.10 ER5754 A95754

22 SFA-5.10 R5087 A95087

22 SFA-5.10 R5183 A95183
22 SFA-5.10 R5183A A95183
22 SFA-5.10 R5187 A95187

22 SFA-5.10 R5249 A95249

22 SFA-5.10 R5356 A95356

22 SFA-5.10 R5356A A95356
22 SFA-5.10 R5554 A95554
22 SFA-5.10 R5556 A95556

22 SFA-5.10 R5556A A95556

22 SFA-5.10 R5556B A95556

22 SFA-5.10 R5556C A95556

22 SFA-5.10 R5654 A95654
22 SFA-5.10 R5654A A95654
22 SFA-5.10 R5754 A95754

23 SFA-5.3 E4043 A94043

23 SFA-5.10 ER4010 A94010
23 SFA-5.10 ER4018 A94018
23 SFA-5.10 ER4043 A94043
23 SFA-5.10 ER4043A A94043
23 SFA-5.10 ER4046 A94046
23 SFA-5.10 ER4047 A94047
23 SFA-5.10 ER4047A A94047
23 SFA-5.10 ER4643 A94643
23 SFA-5.10 ER4943 A94943
23 SFA-5.10 R4010 A94010
23 SFA-5.10 R4011 A94011
23 SFA-5.10 R4018 A94018
23 SFA-5.10 R-A356.0 A13560
23 SFA-5.10 R357.0 A03570
23 SFA-5.10 R-A357.0 A13570

23 SFA-5.10 R4043 A94043

193
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-433 ALTERNATE F-NUMBERS FOR WELDER PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION

The following tables identify the filler metal or electrode that the welder used during qualification testing as “Qualified
With,” and the electrodes or filler metals that the welder is qualified to use in production welding as “Qualified For.” See
Table QW-432 for the F-Number assignments.

Qualified With → F-No. 1 F-No. 1 F-No. 2 F-No. 2 F-No. 3 F-No. 3 F-No. 4 F-No. 4 F-No. 5 F-No. 5
With Without With Without With Without With Without With Without
Qualified For ↓ Backing Backing Backing Backing Backing Backing Backing Backing Backing Backing
F-No. 1 With Backing X X X X X X X X X X
F-No. 1 Without Backing … X … … … … … … … …
F-No. 2 With Backing … … X X X X X X … …
F-No. 2 Without Backing … … … X … … … … … …
F-No. 3 With Backing … … … … X X X X … …
F-No. 3 Without Backing … … … … … X … … … …
F-No. 4 With Backing … … … … … … X X … …
F-No. 4 Without Backing … … … … … … … X … …
F-No. 5 With Backing … … … … … … … … X X
F-No. 5 Without Backing … … … … … … … … … X

Qualified With Qualified For

Any F-No. 6 All F-No. 6 [Note (1)]
Any F-No. 21 through F-No. 26 All F-No. 21 through F-No. 26
Any F-No. 31, F-No. 32, F-No. 33, Only the same F-Number as was used
F-No. 35, F-No. 36, or F-No. 37 during the qualification test
F-No. 34 or any F-No. 41 through F-No. 34 and all F-No. 41 through F-No. 46
F-No. 46
Any F-No. 51 through F-No. 55 All F-No. 51 through F-No. 55
Any F-No. 61 All F-No. 61
Any F-No. 71 through F-No. 72 Only the same F-Number as was used
during the qualification test

NOTE: (1) Deposited weld metal made using a bare rod not covered by an SFA Specification but which conforms to an
analysis listed in Table QW-442 shall be considered to be classified as F-No. 6.

202
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-440 WELD METAL CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

QW-441 GENERAL
Identification of weld metal chemical composition designated on the PQR and WPS shall be as given in QW-404.5.

Table QW-442
A-Numbers
Classification of Ferrous Weld Metal Analysis for Procedure Qualification
Analysis, % [Notes (1), (2)]
A-No. Types of Weld Deposit C Cr Mo Ni Mn Si
1 Mild Steel 0.20 0.20 0.30 0.50 1.60 1.0
2 Carbon-Molybdenum 0.15 0.50 0.40–0.65 0.50 1.60 1.0
Chrome (0.4% to 2%)-
3 0.15 0.40–2.00 0.40–0.65 0.50 1.60 1.0
Molybdenum
Chrome (2% to 4%)-
4 0.15 2.00–4.00 0.40–1.50 0.50 1.60 2.0
Molybdenum
Chrome (4% to 10.5%)-
5 0.15 4.00–10.5 0.40–1.50 0.80 1.20 2.0
Molybdenum
6 Chrome-Martensitic 0.15 11.0–15.0 0.70 0.80 2.00 1.0
7 Chrome-Ferritic 0.15 11.0–30.0 1.00 0.80 1.00 3.0
8 Chromium-Nickel 0.15 14.5–30.0 4.00 7.50–15.0 2.50 1.0
9 Chromium-Nickel 0.30 19.0–30.0 6.00 15.0–37.0 2.50 1.0
10 Nickel to 4% 0.15 0.50 0.55 0.80–4.00 1.70 1.0
11 Manganese-Molybdenum 0.17 0.50 0.25–0.75 0.85 1.25–2.25 1.0
12 Nickel–Chrome—Molybdenum 0.15 1.50 0.25–0.80 1.25–2.80 0.75–2.25 1.0
NOTES:
(1) Single values shown above are maximum.
(2) Only listed elements are used to determine A-numbers.

203
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-450 SPECIMENS

QW-451 PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION THICKNESS LIMITS AND TEST SPECIMENS

Table QW-451.1
Groove-Weld Tension Tests and Transverse-Bend Tests
Range of Thickness T of Base
Metal, Qualified, Maximum Thickness t of Type and Number of Tests Required (Tension and
Thickness T of Test in. (mm) [Notes (1), (2)] Deposited Weld Metal, Guided-Bend Tests) [Note (2)]
Coupon, Welded, Qualified, in. (mm) Tension, Side Bend, Face Bend, Root Bend,
in. (mm) Min. Max. [Notes (1), (2)] QW-150 QW-160 QW-160 QW-160
1
Less than ∕16 (1.5) T 2T 2t 2 ... 2 2
1
∕16 to 3∕8 (1.5 to 10), 1
∕16 (1.5) 2T 2t 2 [Note (5)] 2 2
incl.
3
Over ∕8 (10), but less 3
∕16 (5) 2T 2t 2 [Note (5)] 2 2
than 3∕4 (19)
3
∕4 (19) to less than 3
∕16 (5) 2T 2t when t < 3∕4 (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4 ... ...
11∕2 (38)
3
∕4 (19) to less than 3
∕16 (5) 2T 2T when t ≥ 3∕4 (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4 ... ...
11∕2 (38)
1
1 ∕2 (38) to 6 (150), 3
∕16 (5) 8 (200) [Note (3)] 2t when t < 3∕4 (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4 ... ...
incl.
1
1 ∕2 (38) to 6 (150), 3 8 (200) [Note (3)] when
∕16 (5) 8 (200) [Note (3)] 2 [Note (4)] 4 ... ...
incl. t ≥ 3∕4 (19)
Over 6 (150) 3
∕16 (5) 1.33T 2t when t < 3∕4 (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4 ... ...
[Note (6)]
Over 6 (150) 3
∕16 (5) 1.33T 1.33T when t ≥ 3∕4 (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4 ... ...
[Note (6)]
NOTES:
(1) The following variable further restricts the limits shown in this table when they are referenced in QW-250 for the process under considera-
tion: QW-403.9. Also, QW-202.2, QW-202.3, and QW-202.4 provide exemptions that supersede the limits of this table. Supplementary
essential variable requirements may also further limit thickness ranges in this table.
(2) For combination of welding procedures, see QW-200.4.
(3) For the SMAW, SAW, GMAW, PAW, LLBW, and GTAW welding processes only; otherwise per Note (1) or 2T, or 2t, whichever is applicable.
(4) See QW-151.1, QW-151.2, and QW-151.3 for details on multiple specimens when coupon thicknesses are over 1 in. (25 mm).
(5) Four side-bend tests may be substituted for the required face- and root-bend tests, when thickness T is 3∕8 in. (10 mm) and over.
(6) For test coupons over 6 in. (150 mm) thick, the full thickness of the test coupon shall be welded.

204
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-451.2
Groove-Weld Tension Tests and Longitudinal-Bend Tests
Range of Thickness T Thickness t of Deposited Type and Number of Tests Required
of Base Metal Qualified, Weld Metal Qualified, (Tension and Guided-Bend Tests)
in. (mm) [Notes (1), (2)] in. (mm) [Notes (1), (2)] [Note (2)]
Thickness T of Test Coupon Tension, Face Bend, Root Bend,
Welded, in. (mm) Min. Max. Max. QW-150 QW-160 QW-160
Less than 1∕16 (1.5) T 2T 2t 2 2 2
1
∕16 to 3∕8 (1.5 to 10), incl. 1
∕16 (1.5) 2T 2t 2 2 2
Over 3∕8 (10) 3
∕16 (5) 2T 2t 2 2 2
NOTES:
(1) The following variable further restricts the limits shown in this table when they are referenced in QW-250 for the process under considera-
tion: QW-403.9. Also, QW-202.2, QW-202.3, and QW-202.4 provide exemptions that supersede the limits of this table. Supplementary
essential variable requirements may also further limit thickness ranges in this table.
(2) For combination of welding procedures, see QW-200.4.

Table QW-451.3
Fillet-Weld Tests
Type and Number of
Tests Required
Type of Thickness of Test Coupons [Figure QW-462.4(a) or
Joint as Welded, in. Range Qualified Figure QW-462.4(d)] Macro
Fillet Per Figure QW-462.4(a) All fillet sizes on all base metal thicknesses and all diameters 5
Fillet Per Figure QW-462.4(d) … 4
GENERAL NOTE: A production assembly mockup may be substituted in accordance with QW-181.1.1.

Table QW-451.4
Fillet Welds Qualified by Groove-Weld Tests
Thickness T of Test Coupon
(Plate or Pipe) as Welded Range Qualified Type and Number of Tests Required
All groove tests All fillet sizes on all base metal Fillet welds are qualified when the groove weld is qualified in accordance
thicknesses and all diameters with either Table QW-451.1 or Table QW-451.2 (see QW-202.2)

205
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-452 PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION THICKNESS LIMITS AND TEST SPECIMENS

QW-452.1 Groove-Weld Test. The following tables identify the required type and number of tests and the thickness of
weld metal qualified.

Table QW-452.1(a)
Test Specimens
Type and Number of Examinations and Test Specimens Required
Face Bend Root Bend
Side Bend Figure QW-462.3(a) Figure QW-462.3(a)
Thickness of Weld Metal, Visual Examination Figure QW-462.2 or Figure QW-462.3(b) or Figure QW-462.3(b)
in. (mm) per QW-302.4 [Note (1)] [Notes (1), (2)] [Notes (1), (2)]
Less than 3∕8 (10) X … 1 1
3
∕8 (10) to less than 3∕4 (19) X 2 [Note (3)] … …
3
∕4 (19) and over X 2 … …
GENERAL NOTE: The “Thickness of Weld Metal” is the total weld metal thickness deposited by all welders and all processes in the test coupon
exclusive of the weld reinforcement.

NOTES:
(1) To qualify using positions 5G or 6G, a total of four bend specimens are required. To qualify using a combination of 2G and 5G in a single test
coupon, a total of six bend specimens are required. see QW-302.3. The type of bend test shall be based on weld metal thickness.
(2) Coupons tested by face and root bends shall be limited to weld deposit made by one welder with one or two processes or two welders with one
process each. Weld deposit by each welder and each process shall be present on the convex surface of the appropriate bent specimen.
(3) One face and root bend may be substituted for the two side bends. For a test coupon welded in the 5G or 6G position, two face and two root
bends may be substituted for the four side bends in accordance with Figure QW-463.2(d). For a test coupon welded using a combination of 2G
and 5G positions, three face and three root bends may be substituted for the six side bends in accordance with Figure QW-463.2(f) or Figure
QW-463.2(g).

Table QW-452.1(b)
Thickness of Weld Metal Qualified
Thickness, t, of Weld Metal in the Coupon, in. (mm)
[Notes (1), (2)] Thickness of Weld Metal Qualified [Note (3)]
All 2t
1
∕2 (13) and over with a minimum of three layers Maximum to be welded
NOTES:
(1) When more than one welder, process, or set of essential variables is used during welding of a test coupon, the thickness, t, of the weld metal in
the coupon deposited by each welder, for each process, and with each set of essential variables shall be determined and used individually in
the “Thickness, t, of Weld Metal in the Coupon” column to determine the “Thickness of Weld Metal Qualified.”
(2) Two or more pipe test coupons with different weld metal thickness may be used to determine the weld metal thickness qualified and that
thickness may be applied to production welds to the smallest diameter for which the welder is qualified in accordance with Table QW-452.3.
(3) Thickness of test coupon of 3∕4 in. (19 mm) or over shall be used for qualifying a combination of three or more welders each of whom may use
the same or a different welding process.

Table QW-452.3
Groove-Weld Diameter Limits
Outside Diameter Qualified, in. (mm)
Outside Diameter of Test Coupon, in. (mm) Min. Max.
Less than 1 (25) Size welded Unlimited
1 (25) to 27∕8 (73) 1 (25) Unlimited
Over 27∕8 (73) 27∕8 (73) Unlimited
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Type and number of tests required shall be in accordance with QW-452.1.
(b) 27∕8 in. (73 mm) O.D. is the equivalent of NPS 21∕2 (DN 65).

206
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-452.4
Small Diameter Fillet-Weld Test ð23Þ

Outside Diameter of Test Coupon, Minimum Outside Diameter,

in. (mm) Qualified, in. (mm) Qualified Thickness
Less than 1 (25) Size welded All
1 (25) to 27∕8 (73) 1 (25) All
Over 27∕8 (73) 27∕8 (73) All
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) The type and number of tests required and the qualified fillet sizes shall be in accordance with Table QW-452.5.
(b) 27∕8 in. (73 mm) O.D. is considered the equivalent of NPS 21∕2 (DN 65).

Table QW-452.5
Fillet-Weld Test
Type and Number of
Tests Required
[Figure QW-462.4(b)
or Figure
Thickness of Test Coupon QW-462.4(c)]
Type of Joint as Welded, in. (mm) Qualified Range, in. (mm) Macro Fracture
3
Tee fillet ∕16 (5) or greater All base material thicknesses, fillet sizes, and diameters 27∕8 1 1
[Figure QW-462.4(b)] (73) O.D. and over [Note (2)]
Less than 3∕16 (5) T to 2T base material thickness, T maximum fillet size, and all 1 1
diameters 27∕8 (73) O.D. and over [Note (2)]
GENERAL NOTE: Production assembly mockups may be substituted in accordance with QW-181.2.1.

NOTES:
(1) Test coupon prepared as shown in Figure QW-462.4(b) for plate or Figure QW-462.4(c) for pipe.
(2) 27∕8 in. (73 mm) O.D. is considered the equivalent of NPS 21∕2 (DN 65). For smaller diameter qualifications, refer to Table QW-452.4 or Table
QW-452.6.

Table QW-452.6
Fillet Qualification by Groove-Weld Tests
Thickness of Test Coupon Type and Number
Type of Joint as Welded, in. (mm) Qualified Range of Tests Required
Any groove All thicknesses All base material thicknesses, fillet sizes, Fillet welds are qualified when a welder or
and diameters welding operator qualifies on a groove weld test

207
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-453
Procedure and Performance Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens for Hard-Facing (Wear-Resistant) and
Corrosion-Resistant Overlays
Corrosion-Resistant Overlay Hard-Facing Overlay (Wear-Resistant)
Thickness of Nominal Base Metal Nominal Base Metal Type and Number of
Test Coupon (T) Thickness Qualified (T) Type and Number of Tests Required Thickness Qualified (T) Tests Required
Procedure Qualification Testing
Less than 1 in. T qualified to unlimited Liquid penetrant T qualified up to 1 in. (25 Liquid penetrant
(25 mm) T mm) 3 hardness readings
per specimen
1 in. (25 mm) and 1 in. (25 mm) to unlimited 2 transverse side bend and 2 longitudinal side 1 in. (25 mm) to unlimited Macro test
over T bend, or 4 transverse side bend
Performance Qualification Testing
Less than 1 in. T qualified to unlimited 2 transverse side bend per position T qualified to unlimited Liquid penetrant
(25 mm) T
1 in. (25 mm) and 1 in. (25 mm) to unlimited 1 in. (25 mm) to unlimited Macro test
over T

208
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

QW-460 GRAPHICS

QW-461 POSITIONS
Figure QW-461.1
Positions of Welds — Groove Welds

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) The horizontal reference plane is taken to lie always below the weld under consideration.
(b) Inclination of axis is measured from the horizontal reference plane toward the vertical.
(c) Angle of rotation of face is measured from a line perpendicular to the axis of the weld and lying in a vertical plane containing this axis. The
reference position (0 deg) of rotation of the face invariably points in the direction opposite to that in which the axis angle increases. The angle
of rotation of the face of weld is measured in a clockwise direction from this reference position (0 deg) when looking at point P.

209
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Figure QW-461.2
Positions of Welds — Fillet Welds

210
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Figure QW-461.3
Groove Welds in Plate — Test Positions

Figure QW-461.4
Groove Welds in Pipe — Test Positions

Figure QW-461.5
Fillet Welds in Plate — Test Positions

211
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Figure QW-461.6
Fillet Welds in Pipe — Test Positions

212
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Figure QW-461.7
Stud Welds — Test Positions

Figure QW-461.8
Stud Welds — Welding Positions

213
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Table QW-461.9
Performance Qualification — Position and Diameter Limitations
(Within the Other Limitations of QW-303)
Position and Type Weld Qualified [Note (1)]
Qualification Test Groove Fillet or Tack [Note (2)]
Plate and Pipe Over
Weld Position 24 in. (610 mm) O.D. Pipe ≤24 in. (610 mm) O.D. Plate and Pipe
Plate — Groove 1G F F [Note (3)] F
2G F, H F, H [Note (3)] F, H
3G F, V F [Note (3)] F, H, V
4G F, O F [Note (3)] F, H, O
3G and 4G F, V, O F [Note (3)] All
2G, 3G, and 4G All F, H [Note (3)] All
Special Positions (SP) SP, F SP, F SP, F
Plate — Fillet 1F ... ... F [Note (3)]
2F ... ... F, H [Note (3)]
3F ... ... F, H, V [Note (3)]
4F ... ... F, H, O [Note (3)]
3F and 4F ... ... All [Note (3)]
Special Positions (SP) ... ... SP, F [Note (3)]
Pipe — Groove 1G F F F
[Note (4)] 2G F, H F, H F, H
5G F, V, O F, V, O All
6G All All All
2G and 5G All All All
Special Positions (SP) SP, F SP, F SP, F
Pipe — Fillet 1F ... ... F
[Note (4)] 2F ... ... F, H
2FR ... ... F, H
4F ... ... F, H, O
5F ... ... All
Special Positions (SP) ... ... SP, F
NOTES:
(1) Positions of welding as shown in Figures QW-461.1 and QW-461.2.
F = Flat
H = Horizontal
V = Vertical
O = Overhead
SP = Special Positions (see QW-303.3)
(2) Tack welds are not limited by pipe or tube diameters when their aggregate length does not exceed 25% of the weld circumference.
(3) Pipe 27∕8 in. (73 mm) O.D. and over.
(4) See diameter restrictions in Tables QW-452.3, QW-452.4, and QW-452.6.

214
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Figure QW-461.10
Rotating Tool Design Characteristics (FSW) Referenced in QW-410

QW-462 TEST SPECIMENS x = coupon thickness including reinforcement

y = specimen thickness
The purpose of the QW-462 figures is to give the orga-
nization guidance in dimensioning test specimens for tests As an alternative, any tension specimen dimensional
required for procedure and performance qualifications. geometry meeting the requirements of another
Unless a minimum, maximum, or tolerance is given in welding qualification standard is acceptable as long as
the figures (or as QW-150, QW-160, or QW-180 requires), a cross section can be measured so that an ultimate
the dimensions are to be considered approximate. All tensile strength can be determined. All welding processes,
welding processes and filler material to be qualified filler materials, and heat-affected zones to be qualified
must be included in the test specimen. shall be included in the test specimen. Weld reinforcement
The following nomenclature is in reference to Figures shall be removed prior to testing.
QW-462.1(a) through QW-462.1(e): Single or multiple bend test specimens and jigs meeting
the dimensional requirements of ISO 5173 are also accept-
T = coupon thickness excluding reinforcement able, provided the bend-radius-to-specimen-thickness
W = specimen width, 3∕4 in. (19 mm) ratios shown in Figure QW-466.1 are met.

215
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Figure QW-462.1(a)
ð23Þ Tension — Reduced Section — Plate
Weld reinforcement shall be
made approximately flush
with base metal. Grind
or machine the minimum
amount of material necessary
to obtain approximately Distortion
parallel surfaces over the
reduced section W. 10 in. (250 mm) or as required

Cold straightening Length sufficient

of the test coupon to extend into grip
1/ in.
is permitted prior equal to two-thirds
y 4 to removal of weld
(6 mm) grip length
reinforcement

These edges may Edge of widest

W be thermally cut face of weld

x 1/ in. 1/ in. 1/ in. (6 mm)

4 (6 mm) 4 4
(6 mm)
1i

Parallel length equals

n. in.
Rm

widest width of weld

(25

plus 1/2 in. (13 mm)

m

added length
m)

This section prepared

preferably by machining

GENERAL NOTE: Specimens having a reduced section nominal width, W, that is greater than the nominal 3∕4-in. (19-mm) width may be used.

216
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Figure QW-462.1(b)
ð23Þ Tension — Reduced Section — Pipe

Weld reinforcement shall be

made approximately flush
with base metal. Grind
or machine the minimum
amount of material necessary
to obtain approximately
parallel surfaces over the

)
reduced section W.

R m 25 mm
On ferrous material

in .
these edges may
y

.(
10 in. (250 mm) or be thermally cut

1 in
1/ in.
4 as required
(6 mm)

W Edge of widest
face of weld

1/ in. 1/ in. (6 mm)

x 1/ in.
4
4 4
(6 mm)
(6 mm) This section prepared
preferably by machining

GENERAL NOTE: Specimens having a reduced section nominal width, W, that is greater than the nominal 3∕4 -in. (19-mm) width may be used.

Figure QW-462.1(c)
Tension — Reduced Section Alternate for Pipe

x T [Note (1)]

Reduced section 3 in. (75 mm) min.

[Note (2)]
1/ in. (13 mm)
2

Rad. 1 in. (25 mm) min.

11/16 in. (27 mm) Edge of widest face of weld

NOTES:
(1) The weld reinforcement shall be ground or machined so that the weld thickness does not exceed the base metal thickness T. Machine
minimum amount to obtain approximately parallel surfaces.
(2) The reduced section shall not be less than the width of the weld plus 2y.

217
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Figure QW-462.1(d)
Tension — Reduced Section — Turned Specimens
D R

Weld

B A B

Standard Dimensions, in. (mm)

(a) 0.505 Specimen (b) 0.353 Specimen (c) 0.252 Specimen (d) 0.188 Specimen
A – Length of reduced [Note (1)[ [Note (1)] [Note (1)] [Note (1)]
section
D – Diameter 0.500 ± 0.010 (12.7 ± 0.25) 0.350 ± 0.007 (8.89 ± 0.18) 0.250 ± 0.005 (6.35 ± 0.13) 0.188 ± 0.003 (4.78 ± 0.08)
3 1 3 1
R – Radius of fillet ∕8 (10) min. ∕4 (6) min. ∕16 (5) min. ∕8 (3) min.
3 1 7 1
B – Length of end section 1 ∕8 (35) approx. 1 ∕8 (29) approx. ∕8 (22) approx. ∕2 (13) approx.
3 1 3 1
C – Diameter of end section ∕4 (19) ∕2 (13) ∕8 (10) ∕4 (6)

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Use maximum diameter specimen (a), (b), (c), or (d) that can be cut from the section.
(b) Weld should be in center of reduced section.
(c) Where only a single coupon is required, the center of the specimen should be midway between the surfaces.
(d) The ends may be of any shape to fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way that the load is applied axially.
(e) When the diameter, D, of the reduced section is measured and the actual value is used to calculate the tensile stress, specimens of nominal
diameters other than those shown above may be used.

NOTE: (1) Reduced section A should not be less than width of weld plus 2D.

218
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Figure QW-462.1(e)
Tension — Full Section — Small Diameter Pipe

NOTE: (1) The outside surface of the weld shall be made approximately flush with the base metal to obtain a uniform cross section. The average of
four equally spaced wall thickness measurements shall be used to calculate the tensile strength.

219
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Figure QW-462.2
Side Bend
(1a) For procedure qualification of materials other than P-No. 1 in Table QW/QB-422
if the surfaces of the side-bend test specimens are gas cut, removal by
machining or grinding of not less than 1/8 in. (3 mm) from the surface
shall be required.

(1b) Such removal is not required for P-No. 1 materials, but any resulting
roughness shall be dressed by machining or grinding.

(2) For performance qualification of all materials in Table QW/QB-422, if the surfaces of
specimens are gas cut, any resulting roughness shall be dressed by machining or grinding.

1/ in. (3 mm) min.

8

R1 = 1/8 in.
6 in. (150 mm) or as required (3 mm) max.

w, in. (mm)
T, in. (mm) y, in. (mm)
P-No. 23,
F-No. 23, All other
T F-No. 26, or metals
[Note (1)] P-No. 35
1/ (3) 3/
8 8 (10)
Notes (1)
and (2) 1/ (3) 3/ (10)
8 8

x T
y

GENERAL NOTE: Weld reinforcement and backing strip or backing ring, if any, may be removed flush with the surface of the specimen. Thermal
cutting, machining, or grinding may be employed. Cold straightening is permitted prior to removal of the reinforcement.

NOTES:
(1) When weld deposit t is less than coupon thickness T, side-bend specimen thickness may be t.
(2) When coupon thickness T equals or exceeds 11∕2 in. (38 mm), use one of the following:
(a) Cut specimen into multiple test specimens of thickness y of approximately equal dimensions 3∕4 in. to 11∕2 in. (19 mm to 38 mm).
y = tested specimen thickness when multiple specimens are taken from one coupon.

(b) The specimen may be bent at full width. See requirements on jig width in Figure QW-466.1.

220
 ASME BPVC.IX-2023

Figure QW-462.3(a) Figure QW-462.3(b)

Face and Root Bends — Transverse Face and Root Bends — Longitudinal

11/2 in. (38 mm) 11/2 in. (38 mm)

6 in. (150 mm) or
6 in. (150 mm) or R = 1/8 in. (3 mm) as required R = 1/8 in. (3 mm) max.
as required max.

y y
y T
T T
T y
Face Root
y (Plate) (Pipe) Bend Bend
T
Y, in. (mm)
Face-Bend Specimen — Plate and Pipe
P-No. 23, F-No. 23, All Other
T, in. (mm) or P-No. 35 Metals
11/2 in. (38 mm) <1∕8 (3) T T
6 in. (150 mm) or R = 1/8 in. (3 mm) 1 3
∕8 to ∕8 (3 to 10) 1
∕8 (3) T
as required max.
>3∕8 (10) 1
∕8 (3) 3
∕8 (10)

GENERAL NOTE: Weld reinforcements and backing strip or backing

ring, if any, shall be removed essentially flush with the undisturbed
y surface of the base material. If a recessed strip is used, this surface of
T
T y the specimen may be machined to a depth not exceeding the depth of
y T (Plate) (Pipe) the recess to remove the strip, except that in such cases the thickness
of the finished specimen shall be that specified above.

Root-Bend Specimen — Plate and Pipe

Y, in. (mm)
P-No. 23, F-No. 23, All Other
T, in. (mm) F-No. 26, or P-No. 35 Metals
1
< ∕8 (3) T T
1
∕8 to 3∕8 (3 to 10) 1
∕8 (3) T
3 1 3
∕8 (10) ∕8 (3) ∕8 (10)

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Weld reinforcement and backing strip or backing ring, if any, may
be removed flush with the surface of the specimen. If a recessed
ring is used, this surface of the specimen may be machined to a
depth not exceeding the depth of the recess to remove the ring,
except that in such cases the thickness of the finished specimen
shall be that specified above. Do not flame-cut nonferrous mate-
rial.
(b) If the pipe being tested has a diameter of NPS 4 (DN 100) or less,
the width of the bend specimen may be 3∕4 in. (19 mm) for pipe
diameters NPS 2 (DN 50) to and including NPS 4 (DN 100). The
bend specimen width may be 3∕8 in. (10 mm) for pipe diameters
less than NPS 2 (DN 50) down to and including NPS 3∕8 (DN 10) and
as an alternative, if the pipe being tested is equal to or less than
NPS 1 (DN 25) pipe size, the width of the bend specimens may be
that obtained by cutting the pipe into quarter sections, less an
allowance for saw cuts or machine cutting. These specimens cut
into quarter sections are not required to have one surface
machined flat as shown in this figure. Bend specimens taken
from tubing of comparable sizes may be handled in a similar
manner.

221